Toshiba MD14H63 Schematic

Page 1

FILE NO. 810-200712GR

SERVICE MANUAL

COMBINATION FLAT COLOR TELEVISION AND DVD VIDEO PLAYER

MD14H63

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number. This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, February, 2007 GREEN

Page 2

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this, Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F (30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat required to melt lead-free solder is high.

Page 3

DIGITAL VIDEO

Introduction

Connections

FST Pure is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

Printed in Thailand

COMBINATION FLAT COLOR TELEVISION AND DVD VIDEO PLAYER

MD14H63 MD20H63 MD24H63

OWNER’S MANUAL

Owner’s Record

The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.

Illustration of MD14H63

Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.

Model number: Serial number:

Basic setup

TV operation

Basic playback

Advanced

playback

Function setup

Others

Introduction

Dear Customer,

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV. This manual will help you use many exciting features of your new TV.

Before operating the TV, please read this manual completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.

Safety Precautions

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning symbol in the triangle tells you that the voltage inside this product may be strong enough to cause an electric shock. DO NOT TRY TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT YOURSELF.

The exclamation mark in the triangle tells you that important operating and maintenance instructions follow this symbol.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see items 27 and 28 on page 4.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON TV PICTURE DISPLAY

If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the TV screen for extended periods of time, the image can become permanently ingrained in the cathode ray tube(s) of the TV and cause subtle but permanent ghost images. This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See page 4 for details.

It Makes A Difference Where Your TV Stands

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your new TV, keep these safety tips in mind:

The Issue

If you are like most consumers, you have a TV in your

home. Many homes, in fact, have more than one TV.

The home theater entertainment experience is a

growing trend, and larger TVs are popular purchases; however, they are not always supported on the proper TV stands. Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, audio speakers, chests, or carts. As a result, TVs may fall over, causing unnecessary injur y.

Toshiba Cares!

The consumer electronics industry is committed to making home

entertainment enjoyable and safe.

The Consumer Electronics

Association formed the Home

Entertainment Support Safety Committee, comprised of TV and consumer electronics furniture manufacturers, to advocate children’s safety and educate

consumers and their families about

television safety.

Tune Into Safety

One size does NOT fit all! Use

appropriate furniture large enough to support the

weight of your TV (and other electronic components).

Use appropriate angle braces, straps, and anchors

to secure your furniture to the wall (but never screw anything directly into the TV).

Carefully read and understand the other enclosed

instructions for proper use of this product.

Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture

and TVs.

Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a

VCR, remote control, or toy) that a curious child may reach for.

Remember that children can become excited while

watching a program and can potentially push or pull a TV over.

Share our safety message about this hidden hazard

of the home with your family and friends. Thank you!

2500 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A. Tel. 703-907-7600 Fax 703-907-7690 www.CE.org

CEA is the Sponsor, Producer and Manager of the International CES

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

Important Safety Instructions

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with a dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where it exits the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12) Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

Additional Safety Precautions

14a)

CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not operate normally, take the following precautions:

•

ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to avoid possible electric shock or fire. To prevent personal injur y, never handle the damaged

•

television. ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV

•

any time it has been damaged or dropped.

15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,

do not use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the

blades can be inserted completely to prevent blade exposure.

Wide plug

Installation, Care, and Service

Installation

Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all warnings when installing your TV:

16) WARNING: To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or

other open flames away from this product at all times.

17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal Communications Commission.

18) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT

DAMAGE! Never place the

TV on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing serious personal injury, death, or serious damage to the TV.

19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).

20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can support the weight of the unit.

21) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or candles on top of the TV.

22) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar

•

surface; too close to drapes, curtains,

•

or walls; or in a confined space such as a

•

bookcase, built-in cabinet, or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided

to protect the TV from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.

23) Always place the back of the television at least one (1) inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to allow proper ventilation.

24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is subject to wear or abuse.

25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

Introduction

Page 4

QUALIFIED

SERVICE

TECHNICIAN

Introduction

VIDEO

AUDIO

(MONO)

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 V AC, 60 Hz power source only.

27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the National Electric Code).

Ground clamp

Electric service equipment

Ground clamp

28) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!

Use extreme care to make sure you

• are never in a position where your body

(or any item you are in contact with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits. Never attempt to install any of the following during

• lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables, wires, or any home theater component connected to an antenna or phone system.

Care

For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

29) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove the source of reflections while viewing the TV.

30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or aerosol cleaners.

31) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind into the TV cabinet slots.

Antenna lead-in wire

Antenna discharge unit (NEC Section 810-20)

Grounding conductors (NEC Section 810-21)

Power service grounding electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part H)

32) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.

33) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord ows, closed captions, video game patterns, TV

and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

34) Possible Adverse Effects on TV Picture Display: If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the TV screen for extended periods of time, the image can become permanently ingrained in the cathode ray tube(s) of the TV and cause subtle but permanent ghost images.

This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

of time while it is displaying the following images or formats:

•

Fixed Images, including but not limited to PIP/POP

wind station logos, stock tickers, and websites.

•

Special Formats that do not use the entire screen,

including but not limited to widescreen or letterbox format media viewed on a 4:3 aspect ratio display (with gray or black bars at the top and bottom of the screen); or 4:3 aspect ratio format media viewed on a widescreen/16:9 aspect ratio display (with gray or black bars on the left and right sides of the screen).

Service

35) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC

yourself. Opening and removing the covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

36) If you have the TV serviced:

Ask the service technician to use only replacement

•

parts specified by the manufacturer. Upon completion of service, ask

•

the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.

37) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV. Improper disposal may result in a picture tube implosion and possible personal injury.

Never leave the TV on for extended periods

SHOCK! Never attempt to service the TV

SAFETY PRECAUTION/ Power source

WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance with the

FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Rules could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

CAUTION:

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

WARNING: This product contains a laser beam. Do not attempt to stare at the beam through the DVD disc tray or

the ventilation openings. Staring directly at the beam may cause permanent damage to your eyesight.

This product uses both Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) and other components that contain lead. In your community there might be regulations that require you to dispose these materials properly under environmental considerations. Please contact your local authorities, or the Electronic Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org) for disposal or recycling information.

IMPORTANT RECYCLING INFORMATION

Power source

TO USE AC POWER SOURCE

Wider Hole and Blade

Polarized AC Cord Plug (One blade is wider than the other.)

AC Outlet

Use the AC polarized line cord provided for operation on AC. Insert the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet.

Notes:

Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz).

• Use the attached power cord only. If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to

• file or cut the blade. It is the user’s responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet. If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function,

• simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation. If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before

• pressing the POWER button.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

VIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

Introduction

Precautions

Notes on handling

When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton and

packing materials come in handy. For fully protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed at the factory.

Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near

the unit. Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with the unit for a long time. They will leave marks on the finish.

The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm

after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.

When the unit is not in use, be sure to remove the disc

and turn off the power.

If you do not use the unit for a long period, the unit may

not function properly in the future. Turn on and use the unit occasionally.

Notes on locating

Place the unit on a level surface. Do not use it on a

shaky or unstable surface such as a wobbling table or inclined stand. The loaded disc may come off the proper position and cause damage to the unit.

When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR, the

playback picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away from the TV, radio or VCR.

Notes on cleaning

Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.

For stubborn dirt, Do not use any type of solvent,

such as thinner and benzine, as they may damage the surface of the unit.

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.

Moisture condensation occurs during the

following cases.

When you bring the unit directly from a cold place to a

warm place.

When you use the unit in a room where you just turned

on the heater, or a place where the cold wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.

In summer, when you use the unit in a hot and

humid place just after you move the unit from an air conditioned room.

When you use the unit in a humid place.

Do not use the unit when moisture condensation

may occur.

If you use the unit in such a situation, it may damage

discs and internal parts. Remove the disc, connect the power cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit, and leave it for two or three hours. After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the unit connected to the wall outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.

Wait!

Optical pick-up

lens

Wall outlet

Contents

Introduction

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .............................3

SAFETY PRECAUTION .....................................5

Power source .....................................................5

Precautions ........................................................6

Contents ............................................................7

Notes and lnformation ........................................8

Identification of controls ...................................10

Connections

Antenna connections .......................................13

Cable TV connections ......................................14

Connecting to optional equipment ...................15

Basic setup

Starting setup ..................................................18

Clock setting ....................................................19

Setting the language ........................................20

TV operation status ..........................................20

TV operation

TV operation ....................................................21

Closed captions ...............................................23

To memorize channels .....................................25

Setting the V-Chip ............................................27

Picture control adjustment ...............................30

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats..........31

Stereo and Second Audio Program (SAP) .......32

Setting the digital setup (digital mode) ............. 33

Using the auto shut off feature .........................34

Basic playback

Playing a disc ...................................................35

Advanced playback

Zooming ...........................................................38

Locating desired scene ....................................38

Marking desired scenes ...................................39

Repeat playback ..............................................40

A-B Repeat playback .......................................40

Program playback ............................................41

Random playback ............................................41

Changing angles ..............................................42

Title selection ...................................................42

DVD menu .......................................................42

Changing soundtrack language .......................43

Subtitles ...........................................................43

Disc status .......................................................44

To turn off the PBC ...........................................44

JPEG CD information .......................................45

JPEG CD playback ..........................................46

Function setup

Customizing the function settings ....................47

Temporar y cancel the rating level by

DVD disc ..........................................................52

Others

Language code list ...........................................53

Troubleshooting ............................................... 54

Reception disturbances ...................................56

Specifications ..................................................57

Limited United States Warranty ........................58

Introduction

Page 5

Introduction

VIDEO

AUDIO

(MONO)

Notes and Information

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

Playback side

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and

sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, benzine,

commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight

or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and

dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing

objects on discs outside of their case may cause warping.

On Video CDs

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.

• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the

same way as a DVD.

• Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped

with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Video CD/Audio CD

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track number” respectively. There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

DVD video disc

Title 1 Title 2

Video CD/Audio CD

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers, which stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video disc and you do not find playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, the unit will display a message on-screen.)

ALL

, disc

Notes on copyright

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of copyrighted materials including, without limitation, television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Playable discs

This unit can play the following discs.

Disc Mark

DVD video discs

Video

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio

CDs

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format

CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD or JPEG format

Kodak picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CDROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the DVD player contained in this television will successfully play every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos. If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this television, please contact Toshiba Customer Ser vice.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

Contents

Audio

Video (moving pictures)

Audio

Video (moving pictures)

Audio

Disc Size

12 cm

8 cm

12 cm

8 cm

12 cm

8 cm

Maximum

playback time

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

Approx. 80 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 160 minutes (double sided disc)

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

About this owner’s manual

This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of this unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As such, the unit may not respond to all operating commands. This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of discs.

” may appear on the TV screen during operation.

“

” means that the operation is not permitted by the

A “ unit or the disc. For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback of copyright message of the disc when the STOP ( ) button is pressed. Alternatively, the “ indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

” may also

Introduction

IdentiÞ cation of controls

See the page in for details.

Front panel

Illustration of MD14H63

Rear panel

Illustration of MD14H63

VIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

AC cord

Remote sensor

POWER indicator

VOLUME (▲/▼) buttons

POWER button

OPEN/CLOSE ( ) button

CHANNEL (▲/▼) buttons

AUDIO (L/R) VIDEO IN jacks (LINE IN1)

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO jack

SKIP ( / ) buttons

Disc tray

STOP(■) button

PLAY (▶) button

VIDEO

(MONO)

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

RF IN (VHF/UHF) jack

PHONES jack

AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN jacks (LINE IN 2)

VHF/

UHF

Remote control

Introduction

The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.

OPEN/CLOSE button

TV/DVD button

Direct channel Selection buttons (0-9)

Number buttons (0-9)

DISPLAY button

CH / buttons

SUBTITLE button

PLAY MODE button

Direction buttons

SETUP button

PAUSE button

CH RTN button

SKIP button

TOP MENU button

ANGLE button

21 3827

4420 21

button

2221

INPUT button

ZOOM button

()

///

MENU button

19 47

PLAY button

36 36 22 37

REV button

37 42 42

POWER button SLEEP button

JUMP button VOL +/

buttons

AUDIO SELECT button

MUTE button

DVD MENU button

ENTER button

CANCEL button

STOP button

CLOSED CAPTION button SKIP FF button SLOW button MARKER button

PIC SIZE button

REPEAT A RETURN button

button

B button

18 39 41

32 43

Page 6

Introduction

Connections

IdentiÞ cation of controls (Continued)

Inserting batteries

Open the battery compartment cover in the

direction of the arrow.

Caution:

Never throw batteries into a fire.

Notes:

Be sure to use AAA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with

• applicable laws and regulations. If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with new ones.

• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix battery

• types or use new and used batteries in combination. Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended period

• of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

Remote control basics

•

Press POWER to turn the unit on or off.

•

Select your desired operating mode (TV or DVD) using TV/DVD.

or to move through the channels one channel at a time.

•

Tap CH The Direction buttons ( ///) are also used to navigate on-screen menu system.

• You can directly access specific channels using Direct channel selection buttons.

•

Illustration of MD14H63

Operation:

Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to

• operate. Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor,

• up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.

Install two “R03/AAA” batteries

paying attention

(supplied),

to the polarity diagram in the battery compartment.

Replace the compartment cover.

Approx. 5 meters

Antenna connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system. If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see Cable TV connections

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire)

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination

Antenna

jack

75 ohm coaxial cable (not supplied)

Antenna

jack

300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied)

VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack.

If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300 ohm twin-lead wire, the use of the 300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied) may be necessary.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires)

Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the

Antenna

jack

Combiner (not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied)

VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer (not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner, then attach the combiner to the antenna jack.

Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires)

Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm

Antenna

jack

Combiner (not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire (not supplied)

VHF 75 ohm (not supplied)

twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). Attach the combiner to the antenna jack.

Connections

Cable TV connections

This unit has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box. Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

For subscribers to basic cable TV service

For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the Antenna jack on the back of the unit.

75 ohm coaxial cable

Antenna

jack

For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service

If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the unit. Follow the connections shown below. Set the unit to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

Incoming 75 ohm Cable TV

For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled premium channels

If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your unit. With the switch in the “A” position, tune your unit to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the converter/ descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.

Incoming 75 ohm Cable TV

Splitter

Converter/

descrambler

Converter/

descrambler

A/B switch

75 ohm cable to the unit

Antenna

jack

Antenna

jack

Connecting to optional equipment

Before connecting the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections. You can enjoy the camcorder or high quality dynamic sounds of DVD video discs or audio CDs by connecting the unit to optional audio equipment.

INPUT CH

ENTER

Using the audio/video inputs

0–3

Press INPUT. Press / or Number buttons (0-3) to select the desired mode, then press ENTER. “VIDEO1”, “VIDEO2”, Analog channel or Digital channel will display on the screen for 4 seconds.

Analog channel Digital channel

VIDEO2

(Front)

VIDEO1

(Back)

Note: This key will not operate in DVD mode.

SOURCE SELECTION

0. ANALOG

1. DIGITAL

2. VIDEO1

3. VIDEO2

▲/▼/ 0−3 / ENTER

Connecting to a VCR

Operate your VCR as usual.

: Signal flow

VCR

To Audio/ Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Rear of the unit

VIDEO

VHFVHF UHFUHF

( )

MONO

DIGITALDIGITAL AUDIO OUTAUDIO OUT COAXIALCOAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

VIDEO IN AUDIO IN (L) AUDIO IN (R)

Connecting to a camcorder

To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the unit as shown.

: Signal flow

Camcorder

To Audio/Video OUT

VIDEO IN

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Illustration of MD14H63

AUDIO IN (L)

AUDIO IN (R)

Connecting to a TV Game

You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen.

: Signal flow

To Audio/Video OUT

Notes:

You can also change the TV screen to the external input by pressing the CH / buttons.

• The unit can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of different types

• of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You’ll need to consult each component’s Owner’s Manual for additional information. The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs and other materials, is

• prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and/or criminal liability.

VIDEO IN

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

Illustration of MD14H63

AUDIO IN (L)

AUDIO IN (R)

Connections

VIDEO1

Page 7

Connections

VIDEO

AUDIO

(MONO)

VIDEO

AUDIO

(MONO)

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the unit to optional audio equipment.

This section uses the following reference mark.•

: Front speaker : Rear speaker : Sub woofer

: Center speaker : Signal flow

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the unit to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full benefit of Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.

Use DVD video

Amplifier equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

75 coaxial cable (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

VIDEOVIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)(MONO)

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIOAUDIO R

LINE IN 1

• discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS® decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs. If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

Amplifier equipped with

a DTS decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

75 coaxial cable (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

VIDEOVIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)(MONO)

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIOAUDIO R

LINE IN 1

Use DVD video

• discs or audio CDs encoded via the DTS recording system.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a MPEG audio decoder

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs with dynamic realistic sound by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

VIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)

AUDIO OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

Use DVD video

• discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system.

Amplifier equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

75 coaxial cable (not supplied)

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker system (right and left front speakers).

VIDEO

VHF/ UHF

AUDIO OUT

(MONO)

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

Amplifier equipped with a

Digital audio input

To COAXIAL type digital audio input

Notes:

DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the unit to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver. This

• input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the unit. Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the unit to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall

• outlet before making any connections. The output sound of the unit has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate listening level.

• Otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound. Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the unit’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier’s power on, the

• speakers may be damaged.

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

75 coaxial cable (not supplied)

Connections

Basic setup

Starting setup

The STARTING SETUP function help to install your unit easily. It leads you to the Language selection, TV/CABLE selection and auto channel memory automatically.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system connection is made!

Starting setup

Press POWER. The starting setup function begins and the

Language setup menu appears on the screen. Press or to select your desired language, then press ENTER.

LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE

ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS

Press or to select “TV” or “CABLE”, then press ENTER.

CHANNEL PLAN

TV CABLE

Notes:

Press or to select “START”, then press ENTER.

If you select “CANCEL” and press ENTER, the STARTING SETUP stops and changes to the TV screen.

AUTO SETUP

START CANCEL

•

POWER

ENTER CANCEL

Now the “CH PROGRAM” starts.

After the starting setup is completed, the TV

channel appears on the screen.

CH PROGRAM

ANALOG CH SEARCH

STOP : CANCEL

CH PROGRAM

DIGITAL CH SEARCH

STOP : CANCEL

The starting setup function will work only when you press POWER for the first time. The process of “CH PROGRAM” may take 15 - 30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional cable service. If you press CANCEL in the process of “CH PROGRAM”, starting setup function is canceled.

Clock setting

Example: Setting the clock to “8:30 AM”, 31th. (SAT)

March, 2007.

Press MENU, then press or to select option.

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

Press

to select “

press .

Press or to set the month, then press .

CLOCK SET”, then

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / MENU

CLOCK SET

MONTH 3 DAY 1(THU) YEAR 2007 TIME 12:00AM

/ / / / ENTER / MENU

ENTER

///

Set the day, year and time as in step 3, then press ENTER.

After setting the clock, date and time starts functioning automatically.

To make corrections anytime during the process

Press or repeatedly until the item you want to change blinks, then set the item again.

Notes:

If the unit does not operate properly, or No key

• operation (by the unit and/or the remote control): Static

electricity, etc., may affect the player’s operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again. The TV section has its own menu and also DVD section has

•

its own menu If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60 seconds, the TV menu screen will return to normal TV operation automatically. After a power failure or disconnection of the power, the clock settings will be lost. In this case, reset the present time. When you set the minute, you can change in 10-minutes step by holding down or .

CLOCK SET

MONTH 3 DAY 31(SAT) YEAR 2007 TIME 8:30AM

/ / / / ENTER / MENU

8:30AM SAT

Basic setup

Page 8

Basic setup

Setting the language/ TV operation status

DISPLAY

ENTER

///

TV operation

TV/DVD POWER

0–9,

CH VOL +/–

ENTER INPUT

Setting the language

This unit can display the on screen language in English, Spanish or French.

Press MENU, then press or to select option.

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select “LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/ LANGUE”, then press .

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / MENU

Press or to select the desired language: English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or

French (FRANÇAIS), then press ENTER.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE

ENGLISH ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS

/ / ENTER / MENU

TV operation status

While watching TV

Press DISPLAY to display the information on the screen. When the TV receives a digital signal, press once, the digital information will appear.

Channel

number

Station

name

Content rating

Remaining

Press DISPLAY again, the analog information will appear. To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.

Stereo and

second audio

program

Picture size

time

Clock

Program name

51-3

Moon Star

CITYHD

Remaining Time 0:20 TV-Y7

No program information is available.

Day of the week

STEREO

4 : 3

12:00 PM

ENGLISH

Audio language

CH 12512 : 34AM SAT

Channel

Clock

V-Chip

TV operation

To turn on the unit, press POWER.

The power indicator will light.

Every time you turn on the TV, the unit starts from

• TV mode. When you use TV after DVD operation, press TV/DVD.

Illustration of MD14H63

Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL +/ –.

The volume level will be indicated on the screen

As the volume level increases, so

by green bar do the number of bars. If the volume decreases, the number of green bars also decreases.

VOLUME 32

Set the TV/CABLE selection to the appropriate

position

Press INPUT. Then press / or Number buttons (0 or 1) to select the desired mode (0: ANALOG MODE, 1: DIGITAL MODE), then press ENTER.

TV - VHF/UHF channels CABLE - Cable TV channels

SOURCE SELECTION

0. ANALOG

1. DIGITAL

2. VIDEO1

3. VIDEO2

/ / 0–3 / ENTER

Press CH / or Direct channel selection buttons (0–9) and

channel.

To change to a specific channel (programmed or unprogrammed):

Press Direct channel selection buttons (0-9) on the remote control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.

To change to a specific digital channel:

Press the first 3 digits, then press remaining 3 digits. For example, to select channel 015001, press 0, 1, 5,

14-69

Notes:

Digital cable channels may be represented by channel

• numbers that include a “dash” (e.g., 85–002). These digital channel numbers may not match the numbers in the channel line-up provided by your cable company. This is not a malfunction. If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound will

• automatically be muted.

button to select the

, 0, 0, 1.

TV Cable TV

VHF 2-13

UHF

VHF 2-13

STD/HRC/IRC

14-36

(A) (W)

37-59

(AA) (WW)

60-85

(AAA) (ZZZ)

86-94

(86) (94)

95-99

(A-5) (A-1)

100-125

(100) (125)

(5A)

CH 125

, followed by the

TV operation

TV operation (Continued)

TV operation

CHANNEL UP/DOWN

Press and release CH stops at the next channel set into memory. For proper operation, before selecting channels, they should be set into the memory. See page memorize channels”.

CHANNEL RETURN

This button allows you to go back to the last channel selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to return to the last channel you were watching.

Note:

The CHANNEL RETURN feature is invalid between other input sources.

MUTE

Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The unit’s sound will be silenced and “MUTE” will appear briefly on the screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing this button again or VOL +/–.

/ . The channel automatically

“To

SLEEP

To set the unit to turn off after a preset amount of time, press SLEEP on the remote control. The clock will count down 10 minutes for each press of SLEEP (120, 110, ...10, 0). After the sleep time is programmed, the display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the

CH 012

sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display turns to 0.

CH 007

HEADPHONES

Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini plug into the PHONES jack on the front panel. If you connect headphones, the sound from TV speakers is muted.

MUTE

Illustration of MD14H63

SLEEP

CH VOL +/– MUTE

CH RTN

SLEEP

120

Closed captions

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?

This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another language.

The Closed Caption feature has two options:

•

Captions—An on-screen display of the dialog, narration, and sound effects of programs and videos that are closed-captioned (usually identified as “CC”.)

•

Text—An on-screen display of information not related to the program, such as weather or stock data (if available in your viewing area.)

Notes:

•

When selecting closed captions, the captioning will be delayed approximately 10 seconds.

•

If no caption signal is received, no captions will appear, but the television will remain in the caption mode.

•

ows,

Misspellings or unusual characters may occasionally appear during closed captioning. This is normal with closed captioning, especially with live programs. This is because during live programs, captions are also entered live. These transmissions do not allow time for editing.

•

When captions are being displayed, on-screen displays, such as volume and mute may not be seen or may interfere with closed captions.

•

Some cable systems and copy protection systems may interfere with the closed captioned signal.

•

A closed caption signal may not be decoded in the following situations:

- when a video tape has been dubbed

- when the signal reception is weak

- when the signal reception is non-standard

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS

ON TV PICTURE DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your TV screen for extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) patterns or images (including but not limited to PIP/POP wind closed captions, video game patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, websites, and special formats that do not use the entire screen) can become permanently ingrained in the cathode ray tube(s) of the TV and cause subtle but permanent ghost images. This type of

damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

See item 34 on page 4.

ENTER

///

MENU CLOSED

CAPTION

To view closed captions (analog mode)

Tune the unit to the desired channel in the analog mode. Press MENU, then press or

Note:

You also can display the CLOSED CAPTION menu screen by pressing CLOSED CAPTION on the remote control.

option.

to select

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select “CLOSED CAPTION”, then press .

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / MENU

Press or to select the desired Closed Caption mode, then press ENTER.

To view captions, select C1 or C2 (C1 displays

• translation of the primary language in your area.) Note: If the program or video you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display on-screen. To view text, select T1 or T2.

• Note: If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set the Closed Caption feature to OFF. To turn the Closed Caption feature off, select OFF in

• the Closed Caption menu.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

CLOSED CAPTION

C1 C2 T1 T2 OFF

/ / ENTER / MENU

TV operation

Page 9

TV operation

Closed captions (Continued)

To view closed captions (digital mode)

Tune the unit to the desired channel in the digital mode. Press MENU, then press or to

option.

select

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

Press or to select “DIGITAL SETUP”, then press .

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

Press or to select “CLOSED CAPTION”, then press .

Press or to select “ANALOG CAPTION” or “DIGITAL CAPTION”, then press .

Press or to select the desired Closed Caption mode, then press ENTER.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

DIGITAL SETUP

ADD / ERASE CLOSED CAPTION CC ADVANCED AUDIO LANGUAGE SIGNAL METER

CLOSED CAPTION

ANALOG CAPTION OFF C1/C2/T1/T2/OFF

DIGITAL CAPTION OFF

CS1/CS2/CS3/CS4/CS5/CS6/OFF

CLOSED CAPTION

ANALOG CAPTION OFF C1/C2/T1/T2/OFF

DIGITAL CAPTION OFF

CS1/CS2/CS3/CS4/CS5/CS6/OFF

ENTER

///

CC Advanced feature (digital mode)

Follow steps 1-2 on the left.

Press or to select “CC ADVANCED”, then press .

Press or to select the desired item to adjust, then press .

Press or to select the desired setting, then press ENTER.

You can select from among the following items and parameters.

TEXT SIZE: AUTO, SMALL, STANDARD, LARGE TEXT TYPE: AUTO, DEFAULT, MONO W. SERIF,

PROP W. SERIF, MONO W/O. SERIF, PROP W/O. SERIF, CASUAL, CURSIVE, SMALL CAPITALS TEXT EDGE: AUTO, NONE, RAISED, DEPRESSED, UNIFORM, LEFT DROP SHADOW, RIGHT DROP SHADOW TEXT COLOR: AUTO, BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW, MAGENTA, CYAN BACKGROUND COLOR: AUTO, BLACK, WHITE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW, MAGENTA, CYAN

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

Note:

It is impossible to select the same color with TEXT COLOR and BACKGROUND COLOR.

DIGITAL SETUP

ADD / ERASE CLOSED CAPTION CC ADVANCED AUDIO LANGUAGE SIGNAL METER

CC ADVANCED

TEXT SIZE TEXT TYPE TEXT EDGE TEXT COLOR

BACKGROUND COLOR

To memorize channels

This unit is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the unit’s memory. To use this unit with an antenna, set the TV/CABLE selection to the TV position. When shipped from the factory, this selection is in the CABLE position.

TV/CABLE selection Automatic memory tuning

Press MENU in the TV mode, then press or

option.

to select

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select “TV/CABLE”.

Press or to select “TV” or “CABLE”.

TV - VHF/UHF channels

CABLE - Cable TV channels

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

Note:

You cannot select “TV/CABLE” and “CH PROGRAM” features if you set the channel to “VIDEO1” or “VIDEO2”.

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE TV CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

Press MENU in the TV mode, then press or

option.

to select

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select “CH PROGRAM”.

Press to start “CH PROGRAM”.

The unit will begin memorizing all the channels

available in your area.

When channel programming is complete, the message “COMPLETED” appears.

Press CH / to view the programmed channels.

LANGUAGE / IDIOMA / LANGUE CLOCK SET TV/CABLE CABLE CH PROGRAM

/ / / MENU

(Analog tuning)

(Digital tuning)

///

CH PROGRAM

ANALOG CH SEARCH

STOP : MENU

CH PROGRAM

DIGITAL CH SEARCH

STOP : MENU

TV operation

To memorize channels (Continued)

To ADD/ERASE channels (analog mode)

After you have programmed the channels automatically, you can add or erase specific channels manually.

Press MENU in the analog mode, then press or to select option.

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select “ADD/ERASE”, then press .

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / MENU

Select the desired channel to be memorized or deleted using or . Then press or to

select either ADD or ERASE.

Repeat step 3 for other channels you want to add or erase, then press ENTER.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

ADD / ERASE ANALOG CH 001 ERASE 002 ADD 003 ERASE 004 ADD

/ / / / ENTER / MENU

/// ENTER MENU

To ADD/ERASE channels (digital mode)

After you have programmed the channels automatically, you can add or erase specific channels manually.

Press MENU in the digital mode, then press or to select option.

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

Press or to select “DIGITAL SETUP”, then press .

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

Press or to select “ADD/ERASE”, then press .

Press or to select “ADD/ERASE”, then press . Select the desired channel to be

memorized or deleted using / . Then press

/ to select either ADD or ERASE.

Repeat step 4 for other channels you want to add or erase.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

To add a digital channel you are watching:

Select a channel you want to add. Then select “ADDING CHANNEL” in step 4, then press .

DIGITAL SETUP

ADD / ERASE CLOSED CAPTION CC ADVANCED AUDIO LANGUAGE SIGNAL METER

ADD / ERASE (DTV) ADDING CHANNEL ADD / ERASE CH 15-001 ADD 15-002 ERASE 15-003 ADD 15-004 ERASE 15-005 ERASE 15-006 ERASE 62-001 ADD

Setting the V-Chip

An age limitation can be set to forbid children to watch programs according to “TV RATING” and “MOVIE RATING” level set. To use the V-Chip function, you must register a password.

Notes:

If you forget the password, you cannot set the V-Chip.

• To avoid forgetting the password, write it down and keep in

• the safe place.

To register password

Press MENU, then press or to

option.

select

Press or to select “V-CHIP”, then press .

Enter the password (4 digits) using Number buttons (0–9), then press ENTER.

Enter the same password again using Number buttons (0–9) for safety, then press ENTER.

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

(Digital mode)

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

(Digital mode)

If you input a wrong number, press

•

CANCEL.

V-CHIP SET

NEW PASSWORD :

0–9 / ENTER / CANCEL / MENU

“ ” appears instead of the number.

Now the password is registered and

• V-Chip setting menu will appear on the display.

V-CHIP SET

CONFIRM PASSWORD :

0–9 / ENTER / CANCEL / MENU

To change password

0–9

ENTER

/// CANCEL MENU

In the V-CHIP menu, press or to select “CHANGE PASSWORD”, then press .

Enter the new password using Number buttons (0–9), then press ENTER.

Enter the same password again using Number buttons (0–9) for safety, then press ENTER.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET CHANGE PASSWORD

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET V-CHIP SET (DTV) CHANGE PASSWORD

(Digital mode)

CHANGE PASSWORD

NEW PASSWORD :    

0–9 / ENTER / CANCEL / MENU

CHANGE PASSWORD

CONFIRM PASSWORD :    

0–9 / ENTER / CANCEL / MENU

TV operation

Page 10

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

To set the V-Chip

In the V-CHIP menu, press or to select “V-CHIP SET”, then press .

Press or to select “TV RATING”, then press

or to display the desired setting.

OFF : TV RATING is not set TV-Y : All children TV-Y7 : 7 years old and above TV-G : General audience TV-PG : Parental guidance TV-14 : 14 years old and above TV-MA : 17 years old and above

When you select TV- Y7, TV-PG, TV-14 or TV-MA, press DISPLAY to show the contained rating. Press

/// to select the desired item you want.

Press or to select “MOVIE RATING”, then press .

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET CHANGE PASSWORD

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET V-CHIP SET (DTV) CHANGE PASSWORD

(Digital mode)

V-CHIP SET

TV RATING TV-Y7 MOVIE RATING

DISPLAY TO SET CONTENTS / / / / ENTER / MENU

V-CHIP SET

TV RATING TV-Y7 MOVIE RATING

/ / / MENU

DISPLAY

ENTER

///

Press or to select desired rating, then press or to select ON or OFF. Press MENU

twice.

G : All ages PG : Parental guidance PG-13 : Parental guidance less than 13 years old R :

Under 17 years old Parental guidance suggested

NC-17 : 17 years old and above X : Adult only

Press or to select “V-CHIP”.

Press or to display “ON”. Now your settings are set into the memory.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

To use after the TV is protected

When the program applied to the V-Chip setting is received, enter the password, then press ENTER. Protection can be canceled.

Note:

The V-Chip function is activated only on programs that have the rating signal.

(Analog

mode)

(Digital

mode)

(Analog

mode)

(Digital

mode)

RATING SET

G OFF PG OFF PG-13 OFF R OFF NC-17 OFF X OFF / / / / ENTER / MENU

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET CHANGE PASSWORD

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET V-CHIP SET (DTV) CHANGE PASSWORD

V-CHIP

V-CHIP ON V-CHIP SET CHANGE PASSWORD

V-CHIP

V-CHIP ON V-CHIP SET V-CHIP SET (DTV) CHANGE PASSWORD

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your Toshiba Television will be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes available in the future.

To download the additional V-Chip rating system (when available)

In the V-CHIP menu, press or to select “VCHIP SET (DTV)”, then press .

(You cannot select this feature if the TV is not receiving a digital signal for the current station.)

If the TV is not storing the additional rating system, the TV will begin downloading it, which

may take some time to be completed.

Press or to select “RRT SET”, then press

, and set your preferred content rating limits

for the additional rating system.

V-CHIP

V-CHIP OFF V-CHIP SET V-CHIP SET (DTV) CHANGE PASSWORD

/ / / MENU

SEARCHING

PLEASE WAIT

V-CHIP SET (DTV)

UPDATE RRT SET

PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING:

•

You can only download the additional V-Chip rating system when your TV is receiving a digital signal.

•

When you download the additional rating system, it may take some time for the download to occur.

•

The V-Chip rating information and system are not determined or controlled by the TV or Toshiba.

•

The standard V-Chip rating system is available whether your TV is receiving a digital signal or not, and will block both analog and digital programs. To set program blocking using the standard V-Chip rating system, select V-CHIP SET in step 1 (see page

The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving technology, and availability, content, and format may vary.

for details).

TV operation

Picture control adjustment

Picture controls are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as follows:

Picture control adjustment

Press MENU, then press or to select option, then press .

BRIGHTNESS 0 CONTRAST +32 COLOR 0 TINT 0 SHARPNESS 0

/ / / / MENU

Press or to select the item you want to adjust, then press or to adjust the setting.

BRIGHTNESS 0 CONTRAST +32 COLOR 0 TINT 0 SHARPNESS 0

/ / / / CANCEL / MENU

Selection Pressing

BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST lower higher COLOR paler deeper TINT reddish greenish SHARPNESS

Note:

The CONTRAST default setting is set to maximum (+32) at the factory.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

To return all adjustments to the factory preset

levels

Press CANCEL while making picture adjustments.

darker lighter

softer sharper

/// CANCEL MENU

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

You can view 480i format programs in a variety of picture sizes—4:3, 16:9, ZOOM. The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select the picture size that displays the current program the way that looks best to you.

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

Press PIC SIZE repeatedly on the remote control to cycle among the three picture sizes, as described below.

4:3

16:9

ZOOM

Available picture sizes for the various input sources

: available / ×: not available

Input source 4:3 16:9 ZOOM

4:3 format program (analog) or External input

4:3 format program (digital)

16:9 (Squeeze) format program (digital)

4:3 picture size

•

If receiving a 4:3 format (analog or digital) program, select 4:3 PIC SIZE will typically display the image in its original formatted proportion.

If receiving a 16:9 format (digital) program, select 4:3

• PIC SIZE will typically display the image stretched taller (squeezed.)

Picture size

××

16:9 picture size

If receiving a 4:3 format digital program, the 16:9 PIC

• SIZE is not available. If receiving a 4:3 format analog program, select 16:9

• PIC SIZE will typically display the image stretched wider with bars at the top and bottom.

If receiving a 16:9 format (digital) program, select 16:9

•

PIC SIZE will typically display the image in its original formatted proportion with bars at the top and bottom.

ZOOM picture size (for 16:9 format programs)

If receiving a 4:3 format (analog or digital) program, the

• ZOOM PIC SIZE is not available. If receiving a 16:9 format (digital) program, select

• ZOOM PIC SIZE will typically enlarge the image, retaining the original formatted proportion, but with the sides edges hidden.

PIC SIZE

TV operation

Page 11

TV operation

Stereo and Second Audio Program (SAP)

The unit is equipped with a feature known as multi-channel TV sound or MTS. MTS broadcasts greatly enhance TV viewing by bringing you programs with high fidelity stereo sound. MTS also provides an extra channel called the Second Audio Program or SAP which broadcasters can use to transmit a second language for bilingual transmission or for other purposes.

Setting the SAP (analog mode)

Press MENU in the analog mode, then press or to select

Press or to select “SAP”, then press or

to select ON or OFF.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

option.

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

Listening to stereo sound

When the TV is turned on or a channel selection is made, the “STEREO” will appear on the screen. This means that Stereo broadcasting is available. You can enjoy stereo sound from the left and right speakers.

•

When mono broadcasting is received, no indication is displayed.

•

If the broadcast signal is not strong enough or clear stereo sound is not available, press AUDIO SELECT to change to mono sound. The noise should be eliminated. Press it again to return to the stereo sound.

STEREO

Listening to SAP (Second Audio Program)

When the TV is turned on or a channel selection is made, “SAP” will appear on the screen. This means that the Second Audio Program broadcasting is available.

To select desired sound

Press AUDIO SELECT to select the desired sound.

Broadcast SAP setting Audio display MONO OFF MONO

STEREO OFF STEREO MONO

MONO+SAP OFF MONO

STEREO+SAP OFF STEREO MONO

CH 013

AUDIO SELECT

///

STEREO SAP

STEREO

ON MONO

ON STEREO MONO

ON SAP

CH 013

Setting the digital setup (digital mode)

Selecting the audio language

When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can select one of the audio languages.

Press MENU in the digital mode, then press or to select

Press or to select “DIGITAL SETUP”, then press .

Press or to select “AUDIO LANGUAGE”, then press .

Press / or Number buttons (0-7) to select desired language, then press ENTER.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

option.

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / MENU

DIGITAL SETUP

ADD / ERASE CLOSED CAPTION CC ADVANCED AUDIO LANGUAGE SIGNAL METER

AUDIO LANGUAGE

0. ENGLISH1

1. ENGLISH2

2. ENGLISH3

3. FRENCH

4. NO INFO.

5. NO INFO.

6. NO INFO.

7. NO INFO.

0–7 ENTER

Checking the digital signal strength

You can check the strength of the digital signal by viewing the digital signal meter.

Follow steps 1-2 on the left.

Press or to select “SIGNAL METER”, then press to check the digital signal strength.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

Notes:

Signal meter feature is not available for analog channels.

• When you select a vacant channel, the signal meter may

• react.

0–7

ENTER

///

SIGNAL METER

CHANNEL (DIGITAL) 62-001

WEAK NORMAL GOOD

TV operation

Using the auto shut off feature

To use the auto shut off feature

In case of “AUTO SHUT OFF” is “ON”, if a station being viewed stops broadcasting, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15 minutes.

Press MENU, then press or to

option.

select

Press or to select “AUTO SHUT OFF”, then press or to select “ON” or “OFF”.

Press MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF OFF

/ / / / MENU

(Digital mode)

ADD / ERASE SAP OFF CLOSED CAPTION V-CHIP AUTO SHUT OFF ON

/ / / / MENU

(Analog mode)

V-CHIP DIGITAL SETUP AUTO SHUT OFF ON

/ / / / MENU

(Digital mode)

///

Basic Playback

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

CAUTION

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.

DVD VCD

Basic playback

Preparations:

Insert the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet. If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, you

• need to set “Starting setup” When connecting to other equipment, turn power off.

•

Press POWER on the unit or on the remote control to turn on the unit.

The Power indicator will light.

Every time you press POWER, the unit starts from

• TV mode. When using an amplifier, switch on the amplifier.

•

Press TV/DVD to select DVD mode.

The DVD startup screen will appear on the screen.

“Reading” display will change to “No Disc”. (If DVD disc has already loaded, playback will start automatically.)

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

Place a disc on the disc tray.

There are two different disc sizes. Place the disc in

• the correct guide on the disc tray. If the disc is out of the guide, it may damage the disc and cause the unit to malfunction. Do not place a disc which is unplayable on the disc tray.

•

Illustration of MD14H63

The disc tray opens.

With the playback side facing down.

Reading

Illustration of MD14H63

Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen, if the

• disc has a menu feature. Press / or / to select title, then press ENTER. Title is selected and play commences.

Press STOP to end playback.

To start playback in the stop mode

Press PLAY.

Note: If the unit does not operate properly:

Static electricity, etc., may affect the player’s operation. Disconnect the AC power cord, then connect it again.

3,5 5 61 4

The disc tray closes automatically. On the TV-screen, “

changes to “Reading” and then playback commences.

Reading

Resuming facility

•

The unit records the stopped point, depending on the disc. “ on the screen. Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point). If you press STOP again (“ ”

• appears on the screen.), the unit will clear the stopped point.

”

” appears

Basic playback

Page 12

Basic playback

OPEN/CLOSE

Playing a disc (Continued)

POWER

PAUSE

STOP PLAY

DVD VCD

Basic playback

To pause playback (still mode)

Press PAUSE during playback.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

Notes:

If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen

• according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again

•

Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

•

When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (i.e. the wrong way up) and press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit, “Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

•

Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

•

Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to

• the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs. Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

• Use OPEN/CLOSE to open and close the disc tray. Do not push the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the unit

• to malfunction. Do not push up on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the unit to

• malfunction. In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen

• menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press POWER on your remote control once the movie is completed. There may be a slight delay between you pressing the button and the function activating.

•

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise not usually visible on the TV screen during a normal broadcast may appear

while playing a DVD video disc. It is because due to high resolution pictures on these discs which include a lot of information. The amount of noise depends on the disc you use with this unit. You should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs.

About

The

heading.

To resume normal playback, press PLAY.

The sound is muted during still mode.•

DVD VCD CD

DVD

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

VCD

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the function described under that

To remove the disc

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

Be sure to press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray after you remove the disc.

Remove the disc after the disc tray opens completely.

PAUSE

PLAY FF SKIP /

SLOW REV

DVD VCD

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REV or FF during playback.

DVD VCD

Press PAUSE during still playback.

DVD VCD

Press SLOW during playback.

DVD VCD

Locating a chapter or track

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

Notes:

A prohibition symbol

• available on the disc, or the unit cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the unit.

•

The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or On screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time, you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are very susceptible.

REV: Fast reverse playback FF: Fast forward playback

Each time you press REV or FF, the playback speed changes.

Playing frame by frame

Each time you press PAUSE, the picture advances one frame.

Playing in slow-motion

Each time you press SLOW , the slow-motion speed changes.

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

“ ” may appear at the upper left of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Notes:

The unit mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of

• DVD/VCD video discs. The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

•

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track. When you press twice in quick successions, playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.

Basic playback

Advanced playback

Zooming/Locating desired scene

DVD VCD

Zooming

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Press ZOOM during playback.

Notes:

You can select the Pause or Slow in the zoom mode.

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

•

The center part of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the

/// to view a different part of the

ZOOM

1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and

3 (x 2.0).

Press frame.

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view (

You may move the frame from the center position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT direction.

Off).

DISPLAY

0–9

JUMP

ZOOM

///

CANCEL

ENTER

DVD VCD

Locating desired scene

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback. To check the title, chapter/track and time, press DISPLAY.

Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

“Time” works only in DVD playback

• or DVD resume mode.

Press or to select the “ Time”, “

Notes:

In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time

• can be selected. In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does

• not work. See “To turn off the PBC”

Chapter”.

Track” or “

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

If you input a wrong number, press

•

CANCEL. Refer to the package supplied with

•

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

the disc to check the numbers.

When you change the title,

• playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title. Some discs may not work in the

• above operation.

T C

Title/

Marking desired scenes

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points. You can resume playback from each scene.

DVD

Marking the scenes

VCD

Press MARKER during playback.

Select the blank Marker using or , then press ENTER at the desired scene.

Press MARKER to clear this display.

Notes:

Some discs may not work with the marking operation.

• The marking is canceled when you open the disc tray or

• turn the power off. Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to

• appear. In case of Video CD with PBC, the MARKER is prohibited.

•

1 2 3

Up to 3 scenes can be selected.

• Repeat this procedure to set the

• other 2 scenes.

2 3

00:27:54

CANCEL

ENTER MARKER

DVD

Returning to the scenes

VCD

Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

Press or to select the Marker 1-3.

Press ENTER.

To cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CANCEL.

Playback starts from the marked scene.

01:16:25

1 2 3 02:08:31

00:27:54

01:16:25

2 3

00:27:54

02:08:31

Advanced playback

Page 13

Advanced playback

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

DVD VCD

Repeat playback

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

DVD VCD

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between two selected points.

[DVD] Press / repeatedly to select “Chapter” or

“Title”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current title or chapter.

Repeat

[Video CD, Audio CD] Press to select “Repeat” and then press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or “All”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current track.

Play Mode

If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,

•

press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Notes:

Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is

• prohibited during playback. Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP

•

or is pressed.

Off

/Enter/Play Mode

Off

Repeat

To resume normal playback

Notes:

•

Press REPEAT A-B again.

In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed. You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles. A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated. You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during cer tain scenes of the DVD. A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD. In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

PLAY MODE

ENTER

PLAY SKIP / REPEAT A-B

A-B Repeat playback

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

The start point is selected.

Press REPEAT A-B again.

The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected. Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.

“

” appears on the screen.

Off

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc. And also the unit can playback tracks or files in random order. These feature works for Audio CD, Video CD and JPEG CD.

VCD

DVD

Program playback

VCD

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Press or to select Play Mode, then press ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.

Press position. Use Number buttons (0–9) to input

the track or file numbers.

VCD

Random playback

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

Press / to select Play Mode, then press ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.

Play Mode

/Enter/Play Mode

Play Mode

/// to select the programming

1 2 3

Clear Program Playback

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Play Mode

To program others, repeat step 3.

• If you input a wrong number, press

• CANCEL.

Play Mode

17 2

Clear Program Playback

/Enter/0 9/Cancel/Play Mode

Play Mode

/Enter/Play Mode

Off

Repeat

Program Repeat

Random

Repeat

10 11 12

Press and press ENTER.

Off

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

•

Off

To change the program

1. In the program mode, press /file number.

2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to select the track/file number

to be replaced.

To clear the program one by one

In the program mode, press /file number. Then press CANCEL.

Off

To clear all the programs

In the program mode, press

press ENTER.

Note:

The Program is canceled when you open the disc tray or turn the power off.

Press PLAY.

Off

Note:

In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.

0–9

PLAY MODE

ENTER

/// CANCEL PLAY

SKIP

/// to select “Program Playback”

In case of JPEG file, press SKIP the program playback if the JPEG interval is set to “Off”, see page To resume normal playback, select Play Mode: “Off” in step 2.

The Random Playback will start.

•

In case of JPEG file, press SKIP to continue the random playback if the JPEG interval is set to “Off”, see page

•

If you set “Random” during playback mode, Random playback will begin after the track/file that is currently being played has ended.

To resume normal playback,

• select Play Mode: “Off” in step 2.

to continue

Program Playback

/// to select the track

/// to select “Clear”. Then

Advanced playback

Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

ENTER

DVD MENU

///

PLAY

ANGLE TOP MENU

DVD

Changing angles

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE during playback.

DVD

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

1 2

DVD

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.

When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and soundtrack language, etc. using the menu.

The current angle will appear.

1/9

Title selection

Press TOP MENU during playback.

Title menu appears on the screen.

Press

DVD menu

Press DVD MENU during playback.

The DVD menu appears on the screen.

Press DVD MENU again to resume

• playback at the scene when you

Press

pressed DVD MENU.

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Press ENTER or PLAY.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title. Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

Note:

/// to select the desired title.

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback from the scene point when you pressed DVD MENU.

The playback of the selected title will start.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.

Changing soundtrack language/ Subtitles

DVD

Changing soundtrack language

VCD

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press

AUDIO SELECT.

Notes:

If the desired language is not heard after pressing the

• button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc. The selected soundtrack language is canceled when you

• open the disc tray. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again. If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no sound

• will be heard from the TV/DVD’s speakers.

The current soundtrack language will appear.

1/8 Eng D

Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the desired language is selected.

2/8 Fra D

The on screen display will disappear after a few

• seconds.

SUBTITLE AUDIO SELECT

DVD

Subtitles

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until the desired language is selected.

1/8 Eng

To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until “Off” appears.

Off

The on screen display will disappear after a few

• seconds.

Notes:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change

• subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off. While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you

• open or close the disc tray. In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be

• changed immediately.

Advanced playback

/// to select the desired item.

Page 14

Advanced playback

Disc status/To turn off the PBC

DVD VCD

Disc status

Press DISPLAY during playback. The status display of the disc will appear on the screen in order like the figure below.

DVD

Play status

Title number

VCD (with PBC)

Play status

Track number

Audio CD

Play status

Track number

Chapter number

Subtitle language

1/2

1/1 Eng 1/2 Fra D

Display Off

−/−

Display Off

11/99

Title elapsed playing time

Title total time

00:03:13 01:30:32

Type of audio

Camera angle

1/1

number

Audio language

Track elapsed playing time

Track total time

05:28PBC 45:03

05:28 45:03

Track elapsed playing time

Track total time

34:56 71:33

DISPLAY PLAY MODE

ENTER

VCD

To turn off the PBC

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Press / to select Play Mode, then press ENTER repeatedly to select “Off”.

Off

Play Mode

Repeat

/Enter/Play Mode

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To turn on the PBC

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly until “PBC” appear.

Note:

You can also turn off the PBC by pressing number button 1 and ENTER in the stop mode.

JPEG CD information

This unit can playback the JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-R/RW drive and a JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing JPEG files). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner’s manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for JPEG files is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

JPEG CD information

Limitations on JPEG CD playback

JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include 3-digits extension letters, “jpg”.

• JPEG CD must be corresponded to the ISO standardized files.

• This unit can read 600 files per directory. If one director y has more than 600 files, it reads up to 600 files, the remaining files

• will be omitted. The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc.

Off

• JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read JPEG files depending on its structure.

•

Limitations on display

The maximum number for display is 16 letters.

• Available letters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _

• (under score). Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

•

To playback JPEG CD in the recorded order

Use JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

Name each file including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

Some JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• The CD-R/RW that has non JPEG files cannot be played back.

•

Advanced playback

When you play an Audio CD, the status display will appear

• and remain on the screen.

Advanced playback

Function setup

OPEN/CLOSE

JPEG CD playback

You can select your desired JPEG file on the file menu and picture menu. The selected JPEG file is automatically adjusted to the TV screen. (When the aspect ratio of the JPEG file is different to your TV screen, the black bar will appear at the top and bottom, or the both sides of the TV screen).

JPEG CD playback

Place a JPEG disc on the disc tray, then press OPEN/CLOSE.

A file menu screen will appear on the screen. Press / to select folder.

Press select the desired file.

To display next list, press SKIP or .•

Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on the screen.

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees. Press ANGLE during playback of the image.

”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on

“ the screen.

Zooming an image

Zoom fuction also can be used in viewing JPEG files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming”

Press STOP to end playback.

The file menu appears on the screen.

If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

Notes:

During JPEG playback, you cannot use JUMP and A-B

• Repeat functions. You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random and Program

• functions for JPEG CD playback

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

/36

Collection

Pic-1

Pic-8

Pic-2

Pic-9

Pic-3

Pic-10

Pic-4

Pic-11

Pic-5

Pic-12

Pic-613Pic-13

/// or Number buttons (0–9) to

Pic-714Pic-14

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode

40 41

Slide show playback

The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after another automatically.

Preparation:

Set “JPEG Inter val” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15

Seconds”

Select your desired starting file for the slide show in the step 3 on left.

Press ENTER to start slide show from the selected file.

If you press PAUSE during the slide show, the slide

• show stops temporary. “ ” appears briefly on the screen. Press PLAY or SKIP show. If the picture appears upside down or sideways,

• press ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up. “

”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen. When the slide show playback finished, the file list

• appears. To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file list

• appears.

About file menu

Operation

Media type

Collection

Folder

Pic-1

Pic-2

Pic-3

Pic-4

Pic-5

Pic-613Pic-13

Pic-714Pic-14

: Indicates JPEG file

0-9

PAUSE ZOOM

ENTER

STOP PLAY SKIP ANGLE

again to resume the slide

File number

Pic-8

Pic-9

Pic-10

Pic-11

Pic-12

/0-9/Enter/Play Mode

///

/36

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings to customize per formance to your preference.

DVD VCD

Setting procedure

Press SETUP during stop mode

The following on-screen display appears.

/Enter/Setup/Return

Press or to select the desired section, then press or ENTER.

Press or to select the desired option.

Change the selection using or by referring to the corresponding pages

•

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change other settings. To select another operation, go back to step 2 by pressing repeatedly.

ENTER

///

SETUP

RETURN

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or RETURN.

Function setup

Page 15

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details

Section Option

Details

Menu Subtitle Audio

TV Screen

Display To turn On or Off the operational status display on the

Picture Mode To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one language are recorded on the disc.

To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.

screen.

“Auto”.

JPEG Interval To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.

DRC

Password

Parental

Select Files

To select On or Off for DRC (Dynamic Range Control).

To change the password.

To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.

To select a preferred file type for playing back a CD containing a mixture of file types.

Page

TV Screen

English

Subtitle

English

Audio

English

Menu, Subtitle, Audio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Other:

Other language can be selected (see “Language

code list”

Original (Audio):

The unit will select the first-priority language of each disc.

Off (Subtitle):

Subtitles do not appear.

Notes:

If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the

• first-priority language is selected. If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform

• it by TV MENU

/Setup/Return

TV Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3

: (Letter box)

Select this mode when connecting to a conventional TV. When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.

: (Pan & scan)

4:3

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.

Press OPEN/CLOSE to view in the selected screen size.

Note:

If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it will display 4:3 style.

Display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.

On: On screen displays appear when you press any buttons (factory setting).

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons.

Display Picture Mode JPEG Interval Off

/Setup/Return

4:3

Auto

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details

Picture Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.

Auto: Select this selection normally. The DVD player automatically detects source content, film or video of playback source, and converts that signal in an appropriate method.

Film: The DVD player converts film content pictures appropriately. Suitable for playback of film content pictures.

Video: The DVD player filters video signal and converts it appropriately. Suitable for playback of video content pictures.

Note:

Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

JPEG Interval

You can continuously playback all JPEG files automatically. After the selection below, the disc will start playback on JPEG files which have been recorded.

Off:

Plays back one file at a time.

5 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second intervals.

10 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show in 15 second intervals.

DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down

slightly when played back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.

Off: It plays back at the recording level on the

disc.

Notes:

This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital

• recorded discs. The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ

• depending on DVD video disc.

DRC

/Setup/Return

To change the parental level

Password Parental Off Select Files All

/0–9/Enter/Cancel/Setup/Return

Parental control setting

Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press or until the parental level you require to appear.

Level Off: The parental control setting does not

•

function.

•

Level 8: All DVD software can be played back.

•

Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be

played back. Select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be more severe as the level number is lower.

2) Press or to select “Password”. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input a 4-digit

password. Be sure to remember this number!

If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.

3) Press ENTER to store the password.

4) Press OPEN/CLOSE to activate Parental control

setting. (See “Temporary cancel the rating level by

DVD disc”

Notes:

•

The parental control level is equivalent to the following USA movie ratings.

Level 1: G Level 5: Level 2: Level 6: R Level 3: PG Level 7: NC-17 Level 4: PG-13 Level 8:

The parental control levels for other countries/area than U.S. are included for future use. Check the appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD video disc equipped with the parental control feature in the future.

•

Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

•

Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work.

•

The password is required every time when you change the parental level.

1) Press or to select “Password”.

----

2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to enter the password you have stored.

3) Press ENTER.

The rating is now unlocked.•

4) Press or to select “Parental”, then press or to change the parental level.

5) Press or to select “Password”, then press Number buttons (0–9) to enter the password. Note: You can change the password if you want.

6) Press ENTER. Now the parental level is changed and locked.

If you forget the password.

1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.

2. Remove the disc.

3. Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the disc tray. “No Disc” appears on the screen.

4. Press and hold STOP on the front panel, and at the same time press 7 on the remote control until “PASSWORD CLEAR” appears on the screen.

5. Enter a new password again.

Select Files

You can select the file types to be displayed on the file menu.

All:

Displays all files.

Music Only:

Displays files except JPEG file.

Pictures Only:

Displays only JPEG files.

Note:

If each setup always work under the same condition (especially with DVD discs). Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off.

~ 51 has completed, the unit can

Function setup

Page 16

Function setup

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set. It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

Load a DVD disc and press PLAY or OPEN/CLOSE

on the unit

If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the ENTER key, “Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.” screen will then appear.

Reading

If you wish to cancel the set rating level temporarily, select “Parental Control Level” with or , then press ENTER. If the 4-digit password at step 2 on page the password entering screen will appear as shown in step 4. Alternatively, if the password has not been set, playback will commence. If you don’t know (or have forgotten) the password, select “Cancel Picture”. The setting screen will disappear. Press OPEN/ CLOSE to remove the disc.

Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.

Parental Control Level Cancel Picture

/Enter/Return

has been set,

Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9). Then press ENTER.

Playback will commence if the entered password is correct.

Note:

This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.

OPEN/CLOSE

0–9

ENTER PLAY RETURN

To exit from the entry, press RETURN.

Please enter the

4 digit password

Cancel

/ReturnEnter/0

Others

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 49.

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code

Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919

Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921

Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922

Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529

Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931

Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933

Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932

Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022

Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017

Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011

Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030

Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015

Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018

Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225

Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019

Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025

Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028

Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021

Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033

Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121

Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033

Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136

Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219

Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225

Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335

Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325

English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418

Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019

Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525

Faroese 1625 Latvian Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

Rhaeto-Romance

2823 Urdu 3128

Others

Troubleshooting

Check the following guide for the possible cause of a problem before contacting service.

SYMPTOMS CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

POWER

No power.

TV BROADCAST RECEPTION

Poor or no picture.

Poor or no color.

Picture wobbles or drifts.

No CATV reception.

No reception above channel 13.

Poor or no sound.

TV shuts off.

Closed caption is not activated.

The AC power cord is not connected. Connect the AC power cord to the AC

TV station experiencing problems. Try another channel. 21

Picture control is not adjusted. Check picture control adjustments. 30

Possible local interference. Check for source of reception

Antenna (CABLE) connector is not connected or possible local interference.

TV station experiencing problems. Try another channel. 21

Picture control is not adjusted. Check picture control adjustments. 30

Possible local interference. Check for source of reception distur-

Antenna (CABLE) connector is not connected or possible local interference.

TV station experiencing problems. Try another channel. 21

Antenna (CABLE) connector is not connected or possible local interference.

Cable TV channel is scrambled. Try another channel. 21

CABLE connector is not connected. Check all CABLE connections. 14

TV/CABLE selection is set to the TV position.

Cable TV service interrupted. Contact your Cable TV company. –

TV/CABLE selection is not set to the appropriate position.

UHF antenna is not connected. Check UHF antenna. 13

TV station experiencing problems. Try another channel. 21

Antenna (CABLE) connector is not connected or possible local interference.

Possible local interference. Check for source of reception

The MUTE button is pressed. Press the MUTE button to cancel mute

TV station stopped broadcasting. Try another channel. 21

Sleep timer is set. Set Sleep Timer to “0”. 22

TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed captions.

TV signal is weak. Check CABLE connection of VHF/UHF

The CLOSED CAPTION button is not pressed.

outlet.

disturbance.

Check CABLE connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or rotate antenna.

bance.

Check CABLE connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or rotate antenna.

Set the selection to the CABLE position.

Make sure selection is in the appropriate position.

Check CABLE connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or rotate antenna.

disturbance.

function.

Try another channel.

antenna, reposition or rotate antenna.

Press the CLOSED CAPTION button to turn on the closed caption.

13, 14

23, 24

SYMPTOMS CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

The playback picture has occasional distortion.

The unit does not start playback.

Playback does not follow the course of the disc’s program.

“

” appears on the screen.

REMOTE CONTROL

Remote control does not operate.

DVD

The disc is dirty. Eject the disc and clean it. 8

It is in fast forward or fast reverse playback.

No disc is inserted. Insert a disc. 35

An unplayable disc is inserted. Insert a playable disc (Check the disc

The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the playback side

The disc is not placed within the guide. Place the disc correctly inside the guide

The parental lock function is set. Cancel the parental lock function or

It is in the mode of repeat playback, memory playback, etc.

The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.

The remote control is not aimed at the sensor.

Distance is too far or too much light in the room.

There is an obstacle in the path of the beam.

The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries. 12

The batteries are not inserted correctly. Insert correctly.

Sometimes a small amount of picture distortion may appear. This is not a malfunction.

type and color system).

down.

on the disc tray.

change the parental lock level.

These operations may prevent a proper progress of the contents.

Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

Operate within 5 m or reduce the light of the room.

Clear the path of the beam.

–9

51, 52

–

Others

Page 17

Others

Reception disturbances

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna. Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown below. If one of these symptoms appear when the unit is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast.

IGNITION

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may flutter or drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair dryers.

GHOSTS

Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is the direct path and the other is reflected by tall buildings, hills or other large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may improve the reception.

SNOW

If the unit is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture. If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external antenna may be necessary.

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI)

Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of the antenna or installing an RFI filter may improve the picture.

PICTURE SIZE VARIATION

A slight picture size variation is normal when you adjust the CONTRAST or BRIGHTNESS settings.

SpeciÞ cations

Model MD14H63 MD20H63 MD24H63 General

Power supply AC 120 V 60 Hz

Power consumption

Picture tube

Speaker 1-1/2 × 2-11/16 inches (38.1

Audio output power 1.0 W + 1.0 W

Weight 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg) 55.1 lbs (25.0 kg) 75.0 lbs (34.0 kg)

Dimensions

Television system NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM

Tuner 181 channel freq. synthesized

Antenna input UHF/VHF: 75 coaxial

Color system NTSC

Applicable disc DVD (12 cm, 8 cm), CD (12 cm, 8 cm)

Frequency range DVD: 4 Hz-22 kHz, CD: 4 Hz-20 kHz

Operating conditions Temperature: 5ûC-40ûC (41ûF-104ûF), Operating status: Horizontal,

Input/Output

Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., pin jack × 2

Audio input –8dBm, 50 k , negative sinc., pin jack (L/R) × 2

Audio output (DIGITAL COAXIAL)

Headphone 3.5mm stereo mini jack × 1

Supplied accessories

Remote control (SE-R0258) .......................... 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) ..................................... 2

* Screen size is approximate.

•

This model complies with the above specifications.

•

Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

•

This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.

Operation: 95 W 120 W 140 W

Stand by: 3 W 3 W 3 W

14 inches (355.6 mm) diagonal 20 inches (508.0 mm) diagonal 24 inches (600.0 mm) diagonal

× 68.6 mm), 8 × 2

Width:

17-5/16 inches (440 mm)

Height:

12-1/2 inches (393 mm)

Depth:

15-7/16 inches (392.5 mm)

VHF 2-13

UHF 14-69

CATV 125 Channels

Humidity: Less than 80% RH (no condensation)

0.5 V (p-p), 75 , pin jack × 1

1-13/16 × 3-7/8 inches (45.7 × 99.1 mm), 8 × 2

22-5/8 inches (574 mm)

20-1/4 inches (514.5 mm)

18-15/16 inches (481.5 mm)

25-13/16 inches (655 mm)

22-13/16 inches (580 mm)

18-5/8 inches (472.5 mm)

Others

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

To prevent fire or shock hazard, disconnect the unit from the power source before cleaning. The finish on the cabinet may be cleaned with mild soap and a soft, damp cloth and cared for as other furniture. Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

Others

Limited United States Warranty

for model MD14H63/MD20H63/MD24H63 (“TV Combination”)

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY

PERSON RECEIVING THIS TV COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

TV COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES. TV COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited Ninety (90) Day Warranty on Labor

TACP warrants this TV Combination and its parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, REPAIR OR

REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will come to your home when warranty

service is required. Depending on the type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or the TV Combination will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts

TACP further warrants the parts in this TV Combination against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, REPAIR

OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR THE PART, PROVIDED THAT IF A DEFECTIVE PART IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED AFTER NINETY (90) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE, YOU MUST PAY ALL LABOR CHARGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT THEREOF. After the date that is ninety (90) days after the date of original retail

purchase, you may request in-home service at your expense, or you may deliver the entire TV Combination to a TACP Authorized Service Station. If you elect to deliver the entire TV Combination to a TACP Authorized Service Station, you must pay for all transportation and insurance charges for the TV Combination to and from the TACP Authorized Service Station.

Limited Two (2) Year Warranty on Picture Tube

TACP further warrants the picture tube in this TV Combination against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of two (2) years after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PICTURE TUBE WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PICTURE TUBE WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU, PROVIDED THAT IF A DEFECTIVE PICTURE TUBE IS REPAIRED OR REPLACED AFTER NINETY (90) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE, YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL LABOR CHARGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT THEREOF. After the date that is ninety

(90) days after the date of original retail purchase, you may request in-home service at your expense, or you may deliver the entire TV Combination to a TACP Authorized Service Station. If you elect to deliver the entire TV Combination to a TACP Authorized Ser vice Station, you must pay for all transportation and insurance charges for the TV Combination to and from the TACP Authorized Service Station.

Rental Units

The warranty for TV Combination rental units begins on the date of the first rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.

Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TACP warrants TV Combinations that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) after the date of original retail purchase. DURING

THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.

Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card

Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this TV Combination. Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your TV Combination online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible. By registering your TV Combination you will enable TACP to bring you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.

[continued on next page]

Your Responsibility THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase. (2) All warranty servicing of this TV Combination must be performed by an Authorized TACP Service Station. (3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this TV Combination is purchased and operated in the Continental

U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls, and installation or repair of

antenna systems are not covered by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs, DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE-1394 devices, and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited above, and do not extend to any TV

Combination or parts that have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the TV Combination or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this TV Combination and connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Service

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing the section entitled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:

(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or

contact TACP’s Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.

(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the TACP Authorized Service Station.

For additional information, visit TACP’s website:

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION O ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS TV COMBINATION).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change, modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever. The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any state of the U.S.A.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

www.tacp.toshiba.com

Others

Page 18

VIDEO

AUDIO

(MON O)

CAUTION

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM. TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

VIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIO

LINE IN 1

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity. Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened. Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1

Page 19

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING

As for the places which need special attentions, they are indicated with the labels or seals on the cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the indications and notices in the operation manual.

2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK

There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an electric shock while the electric current is flowing.

3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS

The parts in this equipment have the specific characters of incombustibility and withstand voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is replaced should be used the part which has the same character. Especially as to the important parts for safety which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the table of parts as a mark, the designated parts must be used.

4. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER ASSEMBLING OR WIRING

There are parts which use the insulation material such as a tube or tape for safety, or which are assembled in the condition that these do not contact with the printed board. The inside wiring is designed not to get closer to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts. Therefore, put these parts in the original positions.

5. TAKE CARE TO DEAL WITH THE CATHODE-RAY TUBE

In the condition that an explosion-proof cathoderay tube is set in this equipment, safety is secured against implosion. However, when removing it or serving from backward, it is dangerous to give a shock. Take enough care to deal with it.

6. AVOID AN X-RAY1. KEEP THE NOTICES

Safety is secured against an X-ray by considering about the cathode-ray tube and the high voltage peripheral circuit, etc. Therefore, when repairing the high voltage peripheral circuit, use the designated parts and make sure not modify the circuit. Repairing except indicates causes rising of high voltage, and it emits an X-ray from the cathoderay tube.

PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER

7. SERVICING

Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which were removed in order to service are put in the original positions, or whether there are the portions which are deteriorated around the serviced places serviced or not. Check the insulation between the antenna terminal or external metal and the AC cord plug blades. And be sure the safety of that.

(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)

Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.

Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn on the TV.

Insulation resistance between the cord plug terminals and the eternal exposure metal [Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by using the 500V insulation resistance meter [Note 1].

If the insulation resistance is less than 1M ohm, the inspection repair should be required.

[Note 1]

If you have not the 500V insulation resistance meter, use a Tester.

[Note 2]

External exposure metal: Antenna terminal

HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)

1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be

found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.

2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

A1-2

Page 20

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

READ INSTRUCTIONS

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS

The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

HEED WARNINGS

All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS

All operating and use instructions should be followed.

CLEANING

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

ATTACHMENTS

Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

WATER AND MOISTURE

Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

ACCESSORIES

Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.

8A.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

VENTILATION

Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

10.

POWER SOURCES

This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

11.

GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION

This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

12.

POWER-CORD PROTECTION

Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.

13.

LIGHTNING

To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges.

14.

POWER LINES

An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.

15.

OVERLOADING

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

16.

OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY

Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

PORT ABLE CAR T W ARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

S3126A

A1-3

Page 21

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING

17.

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

SERVICING

18.

Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE

19.

Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.

If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.

If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.

If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.

If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

20.

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

SAFETY CHECK

21.

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING

22.

The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

HEAT

23.

The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

DISC TRA Y

24.

Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.

CONNECTING

25.

When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

SOUND VOLUME

26.

Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

SOUND DISTORTION

27.

Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.

HEADPHONES

28.

When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

LASER BEAM

29.

Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.

DISC

30.

Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

31.

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

A1-4

Page 22

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810-20)

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250, PART H)

A1-5

Page 23

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ Removing the DVD Deck ]

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ Installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

NOTE

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

• Use the Lead Free solder.

• Manual soldering conditions

•

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20˚C

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the

• Flux smoke away from it.

Pick Up PCB

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

Fig. 1

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Remove the Back Cabinet and AV PCB/DVD Block. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY

INSTRUCTIONS.)

Rotate the Main Gear in the direction of the arrow by hand.

(Refer to Fig. 1)

Manually open the Tray.

Deck CDMain Gear

Fig. 1

A1-6

Page 24

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD Mode.

Confirm that the 'No Disc' will be appeared on the screen.

Press and hold the '7' key on the remote control unit.

Simultaneously press and hold the 'STOP' key on the front panel.

Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.

The On Screen Display message 'PASSWORD CLEAR' will appear.

The 4 digit password has now been cleared

TRAY LOCK

Tray cannot be opened by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

2. Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO SELECT' and '0' key of a remote control unit.

3. The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.

4. The Tray Lock has now been set up.

To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

1. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

2. Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO SELECT' and '0' key of a remote control unit.

3. The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.

4. The Tray Lock has now been cleared.

A1-7

Page 25

TABLE OF CONTENTS

•GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

•LEAD-FREE SOLDER

•OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION ................................................................................................................................

SERVICE NOTICES ON CHECKING.......................................................................................

HOW TO ORDER PARTS........................................................................................................

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS...................................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ............................................................................................

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY...........................................................

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL..............................................................................

TRAY LOCK ............................................................................................................................

TABLE OF CONTENTS ..........................................................................................................

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS ...........................................

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .................................................................................

3. REMOVAL OF ANODE CAP ...........................................................................................

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC..............................................

SERVICE MODE LIST.............................................................................................................

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS ....................................................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE .........................................................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DIGITAL FIRMWARE ..................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING OF EEPROM (MEMORY) IC .................................................................

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..............................................................................................

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................................................

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD......................................................................................................................................

TV.........................................................................................................................................

POWER................................................................................................................................

DIGITAL MODULE...............................................................................................................

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT ...............................................................................................................................

DIGITAL ...............................................................................................................................

AV/CRT ................................................................................................................................

LOADING MOTOR/SW ........................................................................................................

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

REGULATOR.......................................................................................................................

MICON .................................................................................................................................

CHROMA/IF .........................................................................................................................

SOUND AMP .......................................................................................................................

IN/OUT .................................................................................................................................

TUNER .................................................................................................................................

DEFLECTION ......................................................................................................................

CRT......................................................................................................................................

POWER................................................................................................................................

MPEG/MICON/DSP .............................................................................................................

MEMORY .............................................................................................................................

MOTOR DRIVE ....................................................................................................................

AUDIO/VIDEO......................................................................................................................

POWER&GROUND .............................................................................................................

SDRAM ................................................................................................................................

FLASH/GPIO........................................................................................................................

VIF/SIF .................................................................................................................................

AV IN/OUT............................................................................................................................

LOADING MOTOR/SW.........................................................................................................

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ............................................................................................

WAVEFORMS .........................................................................................................................

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW ..........................................................................................

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...............................................................................................

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ......................................................................

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ........................................................................

A1-1 A1-2 A1-2 A1-3~A1-5 A1-6 A1-6 A1-7 A1-7 A2-1 A3-1~A3-5

B1-1, B1-2 B2-1~B2-4 B3-1 B4-1, B4-2 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5, C-6 D-1~D-6 E-1~E-10

F-1, F-2 F-3, F-4 F-5, F-6 F-7, F-8

G-1, G-2 G-3, G-4 G-5~G-8 G-9~G-10

H-1, H-2 H-3, H-4 H-5, H-6 H-7, H-8 H-9, H-10 H-11, H-12 H-13, H-14 H-15, H-16 H-17, H-18 H-19, H-20 H-21, H-22 H-23, H-24 H-25, H-26 H-27, H-28 H-29, H-30 H-31, H-32 H-33, H-34 H-35, H-36 H-37, H-38 H-39, H-40 I-1~I-4 J1-1~J1-3 J2-1 K1-1 K2-1 K3-1~K3-6

A2-1

Page 26

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

5oC

0oC

60oC

G-1 T V CRT CRT Size / Visual Size 14 inch / 355.6 mmV

System CRT Type Flat

Color System NTSC Speaker 2 Speaker

Sound Output Max 1.0W + 1.0W

G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC

Disc DVD, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, Video CD

Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DM3PB Search speed Fwd 4 step

Slow speed Fwd 1/7 - 1/2 times

G-3 Tuning Broadcasting Analog US System M

System System Digital ATSC(8VSB), QAM

Tuner and System 1Tuner Receive CH Destination US(w/CABLE)

Intermediate Digital 44.00MHz Frequency Analog 'Picture(FP) 45.75MHz

Preset CH No Stereo/Dual TV Sound US-Stereo Tuner Sound Muting Yes

G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

RGB Signal Output Level -Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm

G-5 Power Power Source AC 120V, 60Hz

Power Consumption at AC 95W at 120V 60Hz

Energy Star No Protector Power Fuse Yes

G-6 Regulation Safety UL(UL1492)

G-7 Temperature Operation

G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH G-9 OSD Language English, French, Spanish

Magnetic Field BV/BH +0.45G / 0.18G

Position Front Side Size 1.5 x 2.7 inch Impedance 8 ohm

10%(Typical) __

DVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)

Actual 2-120 times(DVD, VIDEO CD)

Rev 4 step

Actual 2-120 times(DVD, VIDEO CD)

Actual --

CH Coverage 2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84

Sound(FS) 41.25MHz

FP-FS 4.50MHz

Output Level -S/N Ratio (Weighted) -Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode --

Output Level Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm(DVD/DTV) S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) -Harmonic Distortion -Frequency Response : at DVD --

at Video CD --

at SVCD --

DC --

Stand by (at AC) 3W at 120V 60Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year

Safety Circuit Yes IC Protector(Micro Fuse) No Dew Sensor

Radiation FCC X-Radiation DHHS Laser DHHS

Storage

at CD --

at DC --

4-40 times (CD)

Rev --

~ +4

-2

~ +

A3-1

Page 27

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-10 Clock,Timer Clock Yes

and Timer Clock Display 12H Back-up Calendar Yes(1990/1/1 ~ 2081/12/31)

G-11 Remote Unit RC-NQ

Control Glow in Dark Remocon No

Sleep Timer Max Time 120

Auto Shut Off No Signal 15

On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) No Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec

Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

Total Keys 47 Key Keys Power Yes

Step 10

No Operation -

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

1 Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes 4 Yes 5 Yes 6 Yes 7 Yes 8 Yes 9 Yes 0 Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Search+ Yes Search- Yes Closed Caption/Skip+ Yes Quick View(CH RTN)/Skip- Yes Slow+ Yes Slow- No Pause Yes

Display/TV/DVD Yes

Cancel Yes Audio Select Yes Angle Yes Subtitle Yes Top Menu Yes Menu Yes DVD Menu Yes Return Yes CH Up Yes CH Down Yes Vol Up Yes Vol Down Yes

MENU Cursor Up MENU Cursor Down MENU Cursor Left MENU Cursor Right

Enter Yes Play Mode Yes Input Select/Zoom Yes Repeat A-B Yes Mute Yes Open/Close Yes Sleep Yes Marker Yes Jump Yes Game No Picture Size Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Min Min Min Min

A3-2

Page 28

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-12 Features Auto Shut Off On/Off Yes

(TV) Auto Search No

Game Position No FM Transmitter No Picture Brightness , Contrast , Color, Sharpness Yes

Tint Yes Mode (Picture Preference) Color Temperature CableClear Cinema Mode Aspect

Audio Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance)

Stable Sound Surround

Timer On Timer

Off Timer Sleep Timer Yes Game Timer

Tuning Auto CH Memory Yes

ADD/Delete Yes

Label CH Label

Video Label Favorite CH Lock Hotel Lock

Channel Lock

Video Lock

Front Panel Lock Closed Caption Yes CC Advance Yes Signal Mater Yes Audio Language Yes Auto Setup Yes Picture Size Yes Picture Scroll Zoom Yes CABLE Yes QAM Yes SAP Yes Comb Filter Yes

3 D VM Circuit Protect of FBT Leak Circuit Yes Power On Memory Choke Coil V-chip USA V-chip Yes

CANADA V-chip RRT Setup Yes Digital Out Dolby Digital Yes

MPEG

PCM

DTS HDMI Input Component Input No

No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

No No

No No No No

A3-3

Page 29

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Features Tray Lock Yes (DVD) Auto Stop (Pause, and Resume Stop after 5min.) Yes

G-13 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English

USB (Some USB devices may not be usable.) No Card Slot Reading (Not secured Data) No Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback MP3 Playback Yes (Playability NOT ensured) WMA Playback Yes (Playability NOT ensured) JPEG Playback Yes DivX Play back

Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

Closed Caption Signal in VBI (DVD Playback) Screen Saver

Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit 3D Surround No

Remote Control Unit Yes Battery Yes

Rod Antenna No

Loop Antenna No

U/V Mixer No 300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter No Antenna Change Plug No Guarantee Card No Registration Card Yes Warranty Card No ESP Card No Service Station List No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Columbia Offer Sheet No Information Sheet (Return) Yes Information Sheet (RRT) Netflix Card No

DMF Support

(MPEG) Yes

(PCM) Yes

(DTS) Yes

(DTS)

Yes

w/Guarantee Card Yes

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

OEM Brand No

Poles No

Terminal --

No No

A3-4

Page 30

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-14 Interface Switch Front Power (Tact) Yes

Rear Main Power SW No

Indicator Power Yes (Red)

Terminals Front Video Input RCA x 1

Rear Video Input RCA x 1

G-15 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 440x392.5x393 G-16 Weight Net (Approx.) 13.5kg (29.8lbs)

G-17 Carton Master Carton No

Gift Box Material Double/White

Drop Test Natural Dropping At 1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6 Surfaces

Container Stuffing (40' container) 476 Sets w/Pallet No w/Wrapping No

G-18 Material Cabinet Front PS 94V0 DECABROM

PCB Non-Halogen Demand No

G-19 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA

Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)

Channel Up Yes

Channel Down Yes

Volume Up Yes

Volume Down Yes

Play Yes

Open/Close Yes

Skip+ /Search+ Yes

Skip- /Search- Yes

Still/Pause No

Stop Yes

Main Power SW No

Stand-by No

On Timer No

Audio Input RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

Other Terminal Head Phone

Audio Input RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

Video Output No

Audio Output No

Diversity No

DC Jack 12V(Center +) No

Digital Audio Output Coaxial (DTV & DVD Only)

VHF/UHF Antenna Input F Type

Gross (Approx.) 15.5kg (34.2lbs)

Content --- Sets

Material --- / ---

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---

Description of Origin ---

W/Color Photo Label No

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 550x496x471

Description of Origin Yes

Height (cm) 62

Rear PS 94V0 DECABROM

Jack Panel -

Eyelet Demand Yes

Measures of Whisker Yes

A3-5

Page 31

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS

1-1: BACK CABINET (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 5 screws 1.

Remove the screw 2 which are used for holding the Back Cabinet.

Remove the AC cord from the AC cord hook 3.

Remove the Back Cabinet in the direction of arrow.

Front Cabinet

1-2: CRT PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2) CAUTION: BEFORE REMOVING THE ANODE CAP,

DISCHARGE ELECTRICITY BECAUSE IT CONTAINS HIGH VOLTAGE. BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE OR REPAIR ANY PCB, UNPLUG THE POWER CORD FROM THE AC SOURCE.

Remove the Anode Cap. (Refer to REMOVAL OF ANODE CAP)

Disconnect the following connector: (CP801).

Remove the CRT PCB in the direction of arrow.

Front Cabinet

Back Cabinet

CP801

Fig. 1-1

CRT PCB

1-3: AV PCB/DVD BLOCK (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

Remove the 2 screws 1.

Disconnect the following connectors: (CP351, CP352, CP404 and CP3802).

Remove the AV PCB/DVD Block in the direction of arrow.

CP3802

CP352

Front Cabinet

CP351

AV PCB/DVD Block

1-4: DVD BLOCK (Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Remove the 11 screws 1.

Remove the Top Shield in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors: (CP8001 and CP8002).

Remove the 4 screws 2.

Remove the DVD Block in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 2 screws 3.

Remove the Jack Shield.

Remove the AV PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

(A)

Top Shield

DVD Block

CP404

Fig. 1-3

Fig. 1-2

B1-1

AV PCB

CP8001

Jack Shield

CP8002

Bottom Plate

(B)

(C)

Fig. 1-4

Page 32

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-5: DVD MT PCB/DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Remove the 4 screws 1.

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors: (CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).

Remove the 2 screws 2.

Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

DVD MT PCB

CP2303

CP2302

CP2301

(B)

Pick Up PCB

DVD Deck

(A)

Short circuit using a soldering iron.

Deck Angle

Fig. 1-5

NOTE

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF

1. SERVICING”. Use the Lead Free solder.

2. Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20˚C

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing

4. equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on

5. the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

B1-2

Page 33

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

NOTE

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

2-1: TRAY (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

Set the Tray opened. (Refer to the DISC REMOVAL

METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY)

Unlock the 2 supports (1) and remove the Tray.

Main Frame Ass'y

Tray

NOTE

In case of the Tray installation, install them as the

1. circled section of Fig. 2-1-B so that the each markers are met.

(1)

Fig. 2-1-A

Main Frame Ass'y

2-2: MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)

Remove the screw (1).

1. Unlock the 2 supports (2).

2. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Main Frame Ass'y.

3. Remove the Main Chassis Ass'y.

(1)

(2)

Main Frame Ass'y

Insulator (R)

Main Chassis Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm

Fig. 2-2-A

NOTE

In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y, install it from (1) to

1. (4) in order. (Refer to Fig. 2-2-B) In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y installation, hook the

2. wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-C.

Main Frame Ass'y (Bottom Side)

(3)

Rack Loading

(3)

Traverse Holder

Tray

Fig. 2-1-B

B2-1

(2)

(4)

Check Lock

Main Frame Ass'y

(4)

Check Hook

(1)

Main Chassis Ass'y

Fig. 2-2-B

Fig. 2-2-C

Page 34

DISASSEMBLY INSTR UCTIONS

2-3: LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y/ LOADING BELT

(Refer to Fig. 2-3-A)

Remove the Loading Belt.

Remove the screw (1).

Remove the 2 screws (2).

Remove the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y.

Remove the Pulley Gear.

Loading Belt

(2)

Main Frame Ass'y

Pulley Gear

(1)

• Screw Torque: 2.5 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (1))

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (2))

Loading Motor PCB Ass'y

Fig. 2-3-A

NOTE

In case of the Pulley Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-3-B is correct.

When installing the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-3-C.

In case of the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-3-C.

2-4: RACK LOADING/MAIN GEAR/PULLEY GEAR

(Refer to Fig. 2-4-A)

Press down the catcher (1) and slide the Rack Loading.

Unlock the support (2) and remove the Pulley Gear.

Remove the Main Gear.

Pulley Gear

Main Gear

(2)

(1)

Rack Loading

Main Frame Ass'y

Fig. 2-4-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Rack Loading installation, do not mesh it to the Main Gear as shown the Fig. 2-4-B.

Rack Loading

Main Gear

Check Hook

Fig. 2-4-B

Pulley Motor

Loading Motor

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

The Lever should be position between A and B.

Rack Loading

Check Hook Loading Motor PCB Ass'y

7.0 ± 0.1mm

Fig. 2-3-B

Fig. 2-3-C

2-5: CLAMPER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-5-A)

Press the Clamper and rotate the Clamper Plate

1. clockwise, then unlock the 3 supports (1). Remove the Clamper Plate, Clamper Magnet and

2. Clamper.

Clamper Plate

Clamper Magnet

Main Frame

(1)

Clamper

Fig. 2-5-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Clamper Ass'y installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-5-B.

B2-2

Page 35

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

(1)

Clamper Plate

Clamper

No gap

Fig. 2-5-B

2-6:

TRAVERSE HOLDER/INSULATOR (F)/INSULATOR (R) (Refer to Fig. 2-6-A)

Remove the Traverse Holder.

1. Remove the 2 Insulator (F).

2. Remove the Insulator (R).

Insulator (R)

Main Chassis Ass'y

Insulator (F)

Traverse Holder

Insulator (F)

Fig. 2-6-A

NOTE

1.2.In case of the Insulator (F) installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-6-B. In case of the Insulator (R) installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-6-C.

Switch PCB Ass'y

Middle Gear

(3)

(2)

Motor Gear

Main Chassis Ass'y

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (1))

• Screw Torque: 1.5 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (3))

Feed Motor

Fig. 2-7-A

NOTE

In case of the Motor Gear installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-7-B is correct.

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-7-C.

After the assembly of the Main Chassis Ass'y, hook the wire on the Main Chassis Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-7-D.

Motor Gear

Feed Motor

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

6.0 ± 0.2mm

Fig. 2-7-B

Insulator (F)

Traverse Holder

Insulator (R)

2-7:

SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/MIDDLE GEAR/FEED MOTOR

Main Chassis Ass'y (Top Side)

(Refer to Fig. 2-7-A)

Remove the screw (1).

1. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

2. Unlock the support (2).

3. Remove the Middle Gear.

4. Remove the 2 screws (3).

5. Remove the Feed Motor.

6. Remove the Motor Gear.

Fig. 2-6-B

Fig. 2-6-C

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

~ FEED MOTOR ~

ORANGE (4) BLUE (3)

Switch PCB Ass'y

Main Chassis Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Check Hook

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

YELLOW (2) GREEN (1)

Fig. 2-7-C

Check Hook

Fig. 2-7-D

B2-3

Page 36

DISASSEMBLY INSTR UCTIONS

2-8: FFC WIRE HANDLING

When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 2-8-A to Fig. 2-8-C.

NOTE

Do not make the folding lines except the specified

1. positions for the FFC.

[ 24 pin FFC ]

Printing Surface

Fold back at the border line of the reinforcement plate.

50 ± 1mm

Fold it by 90˚

117 ± 1mm

[ 5 pin FFC ]

(1)

(2)

• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).

Reinforcement Plate

55 ± 1mm

Printing Surface

10 ± 1mm

Printing Surface

[ 6 pin FFC ]

(1)

Reinforcement Plate

Fold

Printing Surface

Fold

(3)

(4)

(3)

Printing Surface

Fold

Printing Surface

60 ± 1mm

73 ± 1mm

10mm

Double Sided Tape

Fig. 2-8-A

Reinforcement Plate

10 ± 1mm

Reinforcement Plate

Fold

Fig. 2-8-B

Reinforcement Plate

53 ± 1mm

Printing Surface

(2)

Printing Surface

• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).

Fold

10 ± 1mm

Printing Surface

(4)

Printing Surface

Fold

Printing Surface

52 ± 1mm

10 ± 1mm

Reinforcement Plate

Fold

Fig. 2-8-C

B2-4

Page 37

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3. REMOVAL OF ANODE CAP

Read the following NOTED items before starting work.

After turning the power off there might still be a potential

voltage that is very dangerous. When removing the Anode Cap, make sure to discharge the Anode Cap's potential voltage.

Do not use pliers to loosen or tighten the Anode Cap terminal, this may cause the spring to be damaged.

REMOVAL

1. Follow the steps as follows to discharge the Anode Cap.

(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

Connect one end of an Alligator Clip to the metal part of a flat-blade screwdriver and the other end to ground. While holding the plastic part of the insulated Screwdriver, touch the support of the Anode with the tip of the Screwdriver. A cracking noise will be heard as the voltage is discharged.

GND on the CRT

3. After one side is removed, pull in the opposite direction to remove the other.

NOTE

Take care not to damage the Rubber Cap.

INSTALLATION

1. Clean the spot where the cap was located with a small amount of alcohol. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)

NOTE

Confirm that there is no dirt, dust, etc. at the spot where the cap was located.

Location of Anode Cap

Fig. 3-3

Screwdriver

Alligator Clip

GND on the CRT

Flip up the sides of the Rubber Cap in the direction of the

2. arrow and remove one side of the support.

(Refer to Fig. 3-2.)

Rubber Cap

Support

CRT

Fig. 3-1

2.3.Arrange the wire of the Anode Cap and make sure the wire is not twisted. Turn over the Rubber Cap. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)

Fig. 3-4

4. Insert one end of the Anode Support into the anode button, then the other as shown in Fig. 3-5.

CRT

Support

Fig. 3-2

Support

CRT

5.6.Confirm that the Support is securely connected. Put on the Rubber Cap without moving any parts.

B3-1

Fig. 3-5

Page 38

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC

REMOVAL

1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package

IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 4-1.) NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within 10 mm distance from IC leads.

Masking Tape (Cotton Tape)

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering

machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-2.)

NOTE

Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the leads completely.

Fig. 4-1

Blower type IC desoldering machine

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-3.)

NOTE

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Blower type IC desoldering machine

Tweezers

4.5.Peel off the Masking Tape. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.

Fig. 4-3

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

Fig. 4-2

IC pattern

Fig. 4-4

B4-1

Page 39

DISASSEMBLY INSTR UCTIONS

INSTALLATION

1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 4-5.)

Soldering Iron

Solder temporarily

Fig. 4-5

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 4-6.)

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 4-8.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

Fig. 4-8

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the IC using a magnifying glass. Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this case.

Solder

Supply soldering from upper position to lower position

Soldering Iron

Fig. 4-6

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 4-7

B4-2

Page 40

SER VICE MODE LIST

This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily. To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote control for more than the standard time in the approoriate condition. (See below chart). In case of the main unit and remote control, press the remote control buttons first, then press the main unit buttons.

Set

Condition

TV mode

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode

(No disc)

TV mode

ALL mode

Set Key Operations

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

Remocon

Key

0 2 sec.

1 2 sec.

4 2 sec.

5 2 sec.

6 2 sec.

8 2 sec.

9 2 sec.

Standard

Time

Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.

Initialization of factory TV data. NOTE:

Initialization of factory DVD data. NOTE:

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen. Can check the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display Adjustment).

Do not use this for normal servicing. If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

Do not use this for normal servicing.

DVD Write mode. Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”. NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen. Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode

(No disc)

Press the following remocon keys continuously. SETUP SUBTITLE 3 AUDIO SELECT 0

STOP 1 3 sec.

STOP 7 2 sec.

Method Operations

Check for the firmware version. Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”. NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK. Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”.

Tray cannot be opened. Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.

C-1

Page 41

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

Serial Communication Change JIG

Ref. No.

JG205

JG206

JG176

Part No.

APJG205000

APJG206000

APJG176120JG176

APJG176125

JG206JG205

Parts Name

Serial Communication Change JIG

Flash UP-Date Soft Disc

Up-Date Disc 2007 SD DTV Rom

Disc

Flash UP-Date Soft Disc

JG176 Up-Date Disc

Remarks

Connect the set to personal computer

Up-Date of the Firmware

Up-Date of the DVD Firmware

Up-Date of the DIGITAL Firmware

JG176

2007 SD DTV Rom Disc

C-2

Page 42

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (0) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set. When inserting Up-Date Disc (JG176) at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "Erase and Program Do Not Power Off" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon. Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc (JG176).

After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen. Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

10.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

11.

Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 3 seconds.

12.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

Turn off the power

13.

F/W Ver. 3SA6A19A Initialize: Complete Laser Drive time DVD LD: 0 Hour CD LD: 0 Hour

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

3 S A 6 A 1 9 A

Fixed

Released times on the same date

Release date (Example: 2006. A.19)

A = October B = November C = December

C-3

Page 43

RE-WRITE FOR DIGITAL SOFT FIRMWARE

Confirm that the AC cord is plugged out.

Using the Serial Communication Change JIG (JG205), connect the set to personal computer. (Refer to Fig. 1)

NOTE: It is possible to write only with the personal computer of WINDOWS.

VIDEOVIDEO

VHF/ UHF

(MONO)(MO N O )

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

AUDIOAUDIO

LINE IN 1

Fig. 1

Using the Flash UP-Date Soft Disc (JG206) and USA SD DTV ROM DISC (JG176), please Re-write the DIGITAL SOFT FIRMWARE. The operating manual for Re-writing is included in Flash UP-Date Soft Disc (JG206).

C-4

Page 44

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION AND DIGITAL TV MICON FRIMWARE.

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours, MICON VERSION and Digital TV MICON Firmware can be checked on the screen. Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE:

N O

NOTE:

If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0". Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode. Set the VOLUME to minimum. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. After the confirmation of each check sum, POWER ON total hours, MICON VERSION and Digital TV MICON Firmware, turn off the power.

The each item value might be different according to each set.

MICON Version Digital TV MICON Firmware Initialsetting data check sum.

Rom correction data check sum.

CRT NO :0000 OEC7176A_19 DTV : CTT71222 INIT : 1FE9 ROM : 3C0D

FIG. 1

POWER ON total hours. = (16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value) + (16 x 16 x housands digit value) + (16 tens digit value) + (ones digit value)

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA

Turn on the POWER, and set to the TV mode.

1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

2. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

3. ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.

ADDRESS DATA

INIT 00 43 CRT NO :0000 OEC7176A_19 DTV : CTT71222 INIT : 1FE9 ROM : 3C0D

FIG.2

ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until

4. required ADDRESS to be changeed is reached. Press ENTER button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

5. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.

6. Pressing RIGHT/LEFT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

8. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the POWER.

10. Set the VOLUME TO minimum.

11. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

12. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

13.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C-5

Page 45

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to TABLE 1.

+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9

43 06 00 20 09 B3 24 0F 41 8C

00 00 06 70 48 10 A1 00 00

10 00 00 00 F0 00 0F 8C

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

20 00 00 00 00 00 08

88 00 00 00 00 0B 64 09 09 00

40 27 40 80 80 80 00 00

33 02 70 10 20 1D 30 00 40

00 74 06 40 FF 11 54 00 0A 45

50 A0

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

60 70

80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 90 00 04 A0 03 00 00

C0 D0

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00 00

03 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

12 14 16 18 1A 1C 1E 20 22 23 2A 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 30 31 31

35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39E03A

04 82

00 00

+B +C +D +E +FINI

00 A0 FA 00 00 00

00 00 85 0B D8 3330

00 FF 01 00 00

00 00 00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00 04 90A0

25 26 27 28 29

32 32 33 33 34 34

3A 3B 3B 3C 3C

3D 3F 40 43 46 49 4C 4F 52

Table 1

55 58 5B 5E 62 67

C-6

Page 46

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

BEFORE MAKING ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

CAUTION

•

Use an isolation transformer when performing any service on this chassis.

•

Before removing the anode cap, discharge electricity because it contains high voltage.

•

When removing a PCB or related component, after unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire back in its original position.

•

When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the IC and Transistor).

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments.

1. Oscilloscope

2. Digital Voltmeter

3. Multi-sound Generator

4. Pattern Generator

On-Screen Display Adjustment

Unplug the AC plug for more than 5 seconds to set the

clock to the non-setting state. Then, set the volume level to minimum. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the

Channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds to appear the adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.

TV-A 4:3

FUNCTION

NO.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 29 30

OSD H OSD C CUT OFF H.POSI H.BLK L H.BLK R V.SIZE V.POSI V.LIN VS.CORR V.COMP R.BIAS G.BIAS B.BIAS R.DRV G.DRV B.DRV BRI CENT BRI MAX

NO.

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

FUNCTION

BRI MIN CONT CENT CONT MAX CONT MIN COL CENT COL MAX COL MIN TINT SHAR CENT SHAR MAX SHAR MIN SUB BIAS H.SIZE PARABOLA TRAPEZIUM COR TOP COR BTM T.STE

Fig. 1-2

2. BASIC SDJUSTMENT

2-1: CONSTANT VOLTAGE

Place the set in AV MODE without signal.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Connect the digital voltmeter to TP401.

Adjust the VR3801 until the digital voltmeter is 115 ± 0.3V.

2-2: CUT OFF

Adjust the unit to the following settings. R CUT OFF=128, G CUT OFF=128, B CUT OFF=128, R DRIVE=64, G DRIVE=15, B DRIVE=64, BRIGHTNESS=00, CONTAST=32.

Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.

Place the set in AV MODE without signal.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (02) on the remote control to select "CUT OFF".

Adjust the Screen Volume until a dim raster is obtained.

00 OSD H 12

Fig. 1-1

Use the Channel UP/DOWN button or Channel button

(0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in Fig. 1-2. Press the MENU button on the remote control to end the

adjustments. To display the adjustment screen for TV-A, TV-D and AV

mode, press the INPUT button on the remote control. To display the adjustment screen for DVD mode, press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel

(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

2-3: WHITE BALANCE NOTE: Adjust after performing CUT OFF adjustment.

Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.

Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern Generator.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (11) on the remote control to select "R.BIAS".

Press the Channel UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R.BIAS", "G.BIAS", "B.BIAS", "R.DRV", "B.DRV" or "G.DRV".

Adjust the Channel UP/DOWN button on the remote control to whiten the R.BIAS, G.BIAS, B.BIAS, R.DRV, B.DRV, and G.DRV at each step tone sections equally.

Perform the above adjustments 5 and 6 until the white color is achieved.

D-1

Page 47

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-4: FOCUS

Receive the monoscope pattern.

Turn the Focus Volume fully counterclockwise once.

Adjust the Focus Volume until picture is distinct.

2-5: OSD POSITION

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

until the difference of A and B becomes minimum.

(Refer to Fig. 2-1).

TV-A 4:3

00 OSD H 12

2-6: HORIZONTAL POSITION

Receive the monoscope pattern.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to select "H.POSI".

Press the RIGHT/LEFT button on the remote control until the SHIFT quantity of the OVER SCAN on right and left becomes minimum.

2-7: VERTICAL POSITION

Receive the monoscope pattern.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (07) on the remote control to select "V.POSI".

Adjust the VR401 unit the horizontal line becomes fit to notch of the shadow mask. (Refer to Fig. 2-2).

horizontal line

Shadow mask

Fig. 2-1

Notch

2-8: VERTICAL SIZE

Receive the monoscope pattern.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (06) on the remote control to select "V.SIZE".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the SHIFT quantity of the OVER SCAN on upside and downside becomes 10 ± 1%.

Receive a broadcast and check it the picture is normal.

2-9: VERTICAL LINEARITY NOTE: Adjust after performing adjustments in section 2-8.

After the adjustment of Vertical Linearity, reconfirm the Vertical Position and Vertical Size adjustments.

Receive the monoscope pattern.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (08) on the remote control to select "V.LIN". Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control unit the SHIFT quantity of the screen becone parallel.

2-10: BRIGHT CENTER

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (29) on the remote control to select "BRI CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the screen begin to shine.

Receive the digital broadcast. (RF Input)

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the DIGITAL mode.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (29) on the remote control to select "BRI CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the screen begin to shine.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

10.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~4.

11.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc.

12.

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

13.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (29) on the remote control to select "BRI CENT".

14.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to set the same step numbers as the AV mode.

Fig. 2-2

D-2

Page 48

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-11: COLOR CENTER

Receive the color bar pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness, contrast, color and tint to normal position.

Connect the oscilloscope to TP803.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "COL CENT".

Adjust the VOLTS RANGE VARIABLE knob of the oscilloscope until the range between white 100% and 0% is the set to 4 scales on the screen of the oscilloscope.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the red color level is adjusted to 110 ± 5% of the white level. (Refer to Fig. 2-3)

Receive the digital broadcast. (RF Input)

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the DIGITAL mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~6.

Receive the color bar pattern. (VIDEO Input)

10.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~6.

11.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc.

12.

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

13.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "COL CENT".

14.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to set the same step numbers as the AV mode.

2-12: TINT

Receive the color bar pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness, contrast, color and tint to normal position.

Connect the oscilloscope toTP801.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (38) on the remote control to select "TINT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the section "A" and "B" becomes a straight line. (Refer to Fig. 2-4).

Receive the digital broadcast. (RF Input)

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the DIGITAL mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~5.

Receive the color bar pattern.(VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~5.

10.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc.

11.

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the DVD mode.

12.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (38) on the remote control to select "TINT".

13.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to set the same step numbers as the AV mode.

White 100%

110%

Fig. 2-3

"A"

"B"

Fig. 2-4

D-3

Page 49

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-13: CONTRAST MAX

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

1. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to

2. normal position. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press

3. the channel button (33) on the remote control to select "CONT MAX". Adjust the WINDOW PATTERN until the contrast step

4. numbers becomes "79". Receive a broadcast and check if the picture is normal.

5. Receive the digital broadcast. (RF Input)

6. Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the

7. DIGITAL mode. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press

8. the channel button (33) on the remote control to select "CONT MAX". Adjust the WINDOW PATTERN until the contrast step

9. numbers becomes "79". Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

10. Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the

11. AV mode. Then perform the above adjustments 2~4. Playback the DVD(480i) disc.

12. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to the

13. DVD mode. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press

14. the channel button (33) on the remote control to select "CONT MAX". Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to set

15. the same step numbers as the AV mode.

2-14: Confirmation of Fixed Value (step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of the each adjustment item is set correctly referring below.

FUNCTION

NO.

OSD C

H.BLK L

H.BLK R

V. POSI

VS.CORR

V.COMP

G.DRV

BRI MAX

BRI MIN

CONT CENT

CONT MIN

COL MAX

COL MIN

SHAR CENT

SHAR MAX

SHAR MIN

SUB BIAS

H. SIZE

PARABOLA

TRAPEZIUM

COR TOP

COR BTM

T.STE

ANALOG

TV-A

05 04 03 06 12 03 15

100

25 50 10

127

00 35 63 15 20 00 00 00 00 00 00

VIDEO1, VIDEO2

05 04 03 06 12 03 15

100

25 50 10

127

00 35 63 15 20 00 00 00 00 00 00

DIGIT AL

TV -D

05 04 03 06 12 03 15

100

25 50 10

127

00 35 63 15 20 00 00 00 00 00 00

DVD

05 04 03 06 12 03 15

100

25 50 10

127

00 35 63 15 20 00 00 00 00 00 00

D-4

Page 50

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. PURITY AND CONVERGENCE

ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE

Turn the unit on and let it warm up for at least 30 minutes before performing the following adjustments.

Place the CRT surface facing east or west to reduce the terrestrial magnetism.

Turn ON the unit and demagnetize with a Degauss Coil.

3-1: STATIC CONVERGENCE (ROUGH ADJUSTMENT)

Tighten the screw for the magnet. Refer to the adjusted CRT for the position. (Refer to Fig. 3-1) If the deflection yoke and magnet are in one body, untighten the screw for the body.

Receive the green raster pattern from the color bar generator.

Slide the deflection yoke until it touches the funnel side of the CRT.

Adjust center of screen to green, with red and blue on the sides, using the pair of purity magnets.

Switch the color bar generator from the green raster pattern to the crosshatch pattern.

Combine red and blue of the 3 color crosshatch pattern on the center of the screen by adjusting the pair of 4 pole magnets.

Combine red/blue (magenta) and green by adjusting the pair of 6 pole magnets.

Adjust the crosshatch pattern to change to white by repeating steps 6 and 7.

3-2: PURITY NOTE

Adjust after performing adjustments in section 3-1.

Receive the green raster pattern from color bar generator.

Adjust the pair of purity magnets to center the color on the screen. Adjust the pair of purity magnets so the color at the ends are equally wide.

Move the deflection yoke backward (to neck side) slowly, and stop it at the position when the whole screen is green.

Confirm red and blue color.

Adjust the slant of the deflection yoke while watching the screen, then tighten the fixing screw.

DEFLECTION YOKE DEFLECTION YOKE SCREW MAGNET SCREW

3-3: STATIC CONVERGENCE NOTE

Adjust after performing adjustments in section 3-2.

Receive the crosshatch pattern from the color bar generator.

Combine red and blue of the 3 color crosshatch pattern on the center of the screen by adjusting the pair of 4 pole magnets.

Combine red/blue (magenta) and green by adjusting the pair of 6 pole magnets.

3-4: DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE NOTE

Adjust after performing adjustments in section 3-3.

1.2.Adjust the differences around the screen by moving the deflection yoke upward/downward and right/left.

(Refer to Fig. 3-2-a)

Insert three wedges between the deflection yoke and CRT funnel to fix the deflection yoke.

(Refer to Fig. 3-2-b)

R G B

UPWARD/DOWNWARD SLANT RIGHT/LEFT SLANT

WEDGE

WEDGE POSITION

R G B

Fig. 3-2-a

WEDGE

Fig. 3-2-b

R G B

6 POLE MAGNETS 4 POLE MAGNETS PURITY MAGNETS

Fig. 3-1

D-5

Page 51

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

4. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

CRT PCB

CRT

CD801

CP801

J801

CP802B

TP801 TP803

TP802

CP803B

AC IN

CD3801

CD302

SPEAKER

(SP302)

DIGITAL PCB

CP101

CP802A

CP8002

CP352

CP8001

CD802

TU5801

S3801

J4201

S3802

J4202

CP3802

CD8101

VR3800

CRT

CP803A

R401

TP401

CD803

CP404

J2201

FB401

J2202

CRT

VR401

J301

J2203

CP351

CD301

SPEAKER

(SP301)

DVD DECK

D-6

AV PCB

CP8101

CD4002

CD2001

CD2301

CD2302

CP2303

CP2302

CP2301

DVD MT PCB

Page 52

(TV SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON (1)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

When turning on the power switch, does the LED light ?

Yes

Is emitter voltage of Q3006 DC5V?

Yes

Does Q402 and Q405 work ?

Yes

Check pins 13 and 36 of IC601 and peripheral circuit.

Check pin 30 of IC6201

and peripheral circuit.

Check Q3006

and peripheral circuit.

Check Q402, Q405 and

peripheral circuit.

E-1

Page 53

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON (2)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is F3801 BROKEN ?

Is the voltage at C3815 DC170V ?

Yes

Is the check feed back switching circuit ok?

Yes

Check Q3803

and peripheral circuit.

Yes

Change F3801.

Check D3807, D3808, D3810, D3811

D3814, D3815, D3816, D3817, R3819

and peripheral circuit.

Check Q3801, Q3802 and

peripheral circuit.

E-2

Page 54

NO PICTURE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Are the Brightness and Contrast set to normal ?

Yes

Is the voltage at pin 1 of CP802 DC9V ?

Yes

Is the signal at pins 14, 15 and 16 of IC601 output ?

Yes

Check Q824, Q825, Q826, Q827,

Q828, Q829 and peripheral circuit.

Is the waveform at pin F1 of IC2401 normal ?

Yes

Replace IC2401.

Adjust Brightness and Contrast.

Check P.CON+9V line.

Check VIDEO OUT line.

E-3

Page 55

GOOD PICTURE BUT NO SOUND

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is CD301 and CD302 inserted?

Yes

Is the voltage at pin 5 of IC301 and IC302 DC 7.6V ?

Yes

Is the voltage at pin 1 of IC301 and IC302 DC 3.8V ?

Yes

Q301 normal?

Insert CD301 and CD302.

Check Sound+B line and

peripheral circuit.

Check POWER_ON_H line

and peripheral circuit.

Check Q301 and A_MUTE line .

Yes

Is the AUDIO OUT signal at pin 8 of IC301 and IC302?

Yes

Check IC301, IC302, speaker and

Headphone jack.

Check AUDIO_OUT_R,

AUDIO_OUT_L line

and peripheral circuit.

E-4

Page 56

NO COLOR

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is the color set to normal ?

Yes

Is the color signal received ?

Yes

Is the wavefrom at pin 35 of IC601 normal ?

Yes

Check peripheral circuit of IC601.

Adjust the color.

Receive the color signal.

Check the peripheral circuit of X601.

E-5

Page 57

ONLY A LINE APPEARS

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is the signal at pin 19 of IC601 normal ?

Yes

Is there a waveform at IIC BUS line normal?

Yes

Is the signal at pin 5

of IC401 normal?

Yes

Check DY and peripheral circuit.

Is the voltage at pin 6 of IC401 25V?

Yes

Check IC401 and peripheral circuit.

Check the peripheral circuit of IC601.

Check IIC BUS line control IC.

Check FB401 and peripheral circuit.

OSD SCREEN DOES NOT APPEAR

Is there a waveform at pins 60, 62, 63 and 64 of IC101 ?

Yes

Is there a waveform at pins 54, 55, 56 and 57 of IC601 ?

Yes

Replace IC601.

Check IC101 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC601 at pins 14, 15 and 16

peripheral circuit.

E-6

Page 58

(DVD SECTION)

NO OPEN/CLOSE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Dose DVD OSD appear at display ?

Does IC2301 operate normally ?

Change DVD LOADER.

Yes

Is CP2302 connected ?

Yes

Connect CP2302.

Change IC2301.

E-7

Page 59

DVD NO PICTURE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is CP8101 connected ?

Yes

Is there input signal at pins 1, 3 and 5 of CP8101 ?

Check oscillation of X4001 ?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Yes

Connect CP8101.

Check IC601.

Change X4001.

E-8

Page 60

DVD, CD NO PLAY

("BLUE BACK LOGO" SHOW ON

SCREEN.)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

After reading,check "INCORRECT DISC" display ?

Yes

When play, check the DECK MOTOR moving ?

Is CD2001 connected ?

Connect CD2001.

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Is CP2301 connected ?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Connect CP2301.

E-9

Page 61

INSTABILITY DVD MODE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is CD8101 connected ?

Yes

Does connected of DVD DECK do short ?

Yes

Is CD2001 and CD2302 connected ?

Yes

Connect CD8101.

Change DVD DECK.

Connect CD2001 and CD2302.

Change DVD DECK.

E-10

Page 62

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

202

115

123

201

123

201

117

201

102C

116

PCB110

201

(CRT PCB ASS'Y)

202

102

102A

102B

202

205

202

102C

212

123

101J

101D

101K

101I

101J

101C

101J

208

101A

101B

101H

101J

214

208

101G

101F

101

101E

208

212

101I

J1-1

Page 63

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

211

122

211

122

207

114

207

107

104

210

207

119

207

210

207

108

PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

210

PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

207

118

207

118

207

110

203

207

121

205

207

111

205

203

112

204

113

204

209

103

127

206

213

106

109

209

PCBD20 (AV PCB ASS'Y)

205

206

105

J1-2

Page 64

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

130, 131, 132, 133, TM101

126

128

124

126

125

129

127

J1-3

Page 65

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

600

608

611

612

615

610

SW1

704

Cannot supply separately. If the repair is needed, replace the LOADER SUB ASS'Y.

602

609

M2603

614

607

613

616

CLASS

GREASE

PCB640 (SW PCB ASS'Y)

605

601

MARK

SW2

605

NOTE:

CD2301

PCB610 (LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y)

705

701

CD2001

CD2302

617

604

702

703

Do not replace the parts. Because,

606

minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more. If the repair is needed, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

603

M2602

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section. Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

Page 66

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

101 75006628 7A701A866A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A 75006629 701WPJD419 CABINET FRONT 101B 75006630 712WPJC305 FLAP DVD 101C 72783647 713WPAA205 GLASS LED 101D 72783648 713WPAA204 GUIDE REMOCON 101E 72783649 735WPAA894 BUTTON FRAME 2 101F 72783650 735WPAA895 STOPPER BUTTON 101G 72783651 735WPBB344 BUTTON FRAME 1 101H 72798625 742WKA0001 SPRING DVD-FLAP 101I 72783652 761WPAA123 HOLDER BOSS 101J 72796103 800WQ0A052 FELT SHEET 101K 72796292 723549A039 BADGE BRAND

102 75006631 7A702A297A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A 75006632 702WPAB043 CABINET BACK 102B 72796299 800WQ0A040 FELT SHEET 102C 72798774 800WQ0A045 FELT SHEET

103 75006373 7G7520045A SHIELD BOTTOM ASS'Y 104 75006377 761WSAA066 ANGLE DECK 105 75006602 761WPAA153 HOLDER FBT 106 72795676 752WSA0290 SHIELD COMPO 107 72798688 774WPA0006 HOLDER WIRE 108 72781978 8965TS1017 CUSHION 65TS10-10(17.5*20*14) 109 75006374 702WSAA189 PLATE BOTTOM

110 72799373 702WSA0213 SHIELD TOP 111 75006375 723000D473 SHEET JACK 112 72799698 724WNAA008 SHEET PC 113 72798640 752WSA0333 SHIELD JACK 114 72795680 8995034000 CORD CLIP UL CO. 115 75006633 722549A693 SHEET RATING 116 72783657 726000A136 SHEET CRT SERVICEMAN 117 72795687 741WUA0021 SPRING EARTH 118 72795699 899EFBA002 WIRING-CLIP 119 72783197 753WEA0033 SHEET CU

120 75006289 800WR00081 SHEET SILICONE 121 75006378 706WPAA013 COVER CONNECTOR 122 72798655 753WUA0069 SPRING EARTH 123 72798754 800WB00004 FIBER WASHER 7*3.2*T0.5 124 72782852 791WHAA137 LIGHTRON SHEET 125 72795621 791WHAA126 FILM BAG 126 72781017 792WHAA149 PACKAGE T0P 127 72781016 792WHAA148 PACKAGE BOTTOM 128 75006635 793WCDD378 GIFT BOX 129 75006634 723000D478 SHEET BAR CODE

130 72781635 JB5ND300 POLYBAG INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 131 72781569 J3N51617A REGISTRATION CARD 132 72781605 J5S10229A INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA 133 75006383 J5Y80101A INSTRUCTION BOOK

201 72781284 8121L50B8U SCREW TAPPING(BO) GW15 5*28 CH HEXAGON 202 72781279 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH 203 72798794 811754080U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*8 CH 204 72781255 8109I3080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*8 CH 205 72798787 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 206 72781251 810963080Q SCREW TAP TITE(B) BRAZIER 3*8 STAINLESS 207 72781247 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 208 72798791 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH 209 72798786 810763080U SCREW TAP TITE(S) BRAZIER 3*8 CH

210 72781263 810F13080U SEMS(F) 3*8 CH 211 72795782 811022680U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH 212 72798790 811063080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*8 CH 213 72798789 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 214 72798793 8110E3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) WH10 3*8 CH

K1-1

Page 67

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 75006298 A2J901T650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A2J901T650 601 72795767 92P100109A HOLDER,TRAVERSE

602 72795768 92P100094A CLAMPER 603 72795769 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 604 75006299 92P100108B GEAR,MIDDLE 605 72795771 92P200013A INSULATOR(F) 606 72795772 92P200014A INSULATOR(R) 607 72781331 92SBB0029A LOADER SUB ASS'Y 608 72795774 92P100095A GEAR,PULLEY 609 72795775 92P100097A PULLEY,MOTOR

610 72795776 92P100096A GEAR,MAIN 611 72781328 92P200015A BELT,LOADING 612 72795778 92P000014A PLATE,CLAMPER 613 72795779 92P100093A RACK,LOADING 614 72795780 92P100091A FRAME,MAIN 615 72798838 92P100092A TRAY 616 72795888 800WFAA008 CUSHION C 617 72796105 7230007850 SHEET,FFC

701 72795782 811022680U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH 702 72795783 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH 703 72795784 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH 704 72795785 814011730U SCREW,PAN M1.7*3 P3 CH 705 72796070 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001 72783183 122J4O1903 CORD JUMPER 127000-2928 CD2301 72795869 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102 CD2302 72795870 122H052601 CORD JUMPER 2H052601 ! M2602 72795947 1515S98003 FEED MOTOR BCZ3B03B ! M2603 72795948 1596S18003 MOTOR,LOADING BCZ3B52B PCB610 72795956 A5R801V610 LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y DED003A PCB640 72795957 A2F401H640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED012B SW1 72796050 0515S32002 SWITCH SSS-13-2 SW2 72796052 0500101037 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH24

K2-1

Page 68

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! R401 72797910 R3X28AR56J R,METAL OXIDE 0.56 OHM 2W ! R409 72781722 R4K1T4472F R,METAL 4.7K OHM 1/4W ! R412 72781717 R4K1T4183F R,METAL 18K OHM 1/4W ! R416 72783394 R4K1T4153F R,METAL 15K OHM 1/4W ! R419 72781689 R3K58A151J R,METAL OXIDE 150 OHM 2W ! R428 72781693 R3K58A221J R,METAL OXIDE 220 OHM 2W ! R449 72795519 R65581010J R,FUSE 1 OHM 1W ! R450 72781704 R3K58B6R8J R,METAL OXIDE 6.8 OHM 3W ! R454 72794608 R3K581102J R,METAL OXIDE 1K OHM 1W ! R455 72781738 R63881330J R,FUSE 33 OHM 1W R804 72783957 R3K18A153J R,METAL 15K OHM 2W R808 72783957 R3K18A153J R,METAL 15K OHM 2W R812 72783957 R3K18A153J R,METAL 15K OHM 2W ! R3003 72797918 R3X28B1R8J R,METAL OXIDE 1.8 OHM 3W ! R3033 72781702 R3K58B4R7J R,METAL OXIDE 4.7 OHM 3W ! R3801 72781721 R4K1T4332F R,METAL 3.3K OHM 1/4W ! R3807 72795500 R002T2155J RC 1.5M OHM 1/2W ! R3808 72794631 R0G3K2275K RC 2.7M OHM 1/2W ! R3812 72781680 R3K581331J R,METAL OXIDE 330 OHM 1W ! R3819 72795523 R5X2AE010J R,CEMENT 1 OHM 7W ! R3820 72781683 R3K581R33J R,METAL OXIDE 0.33 OHM 1W ! R3826 72794633 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W ! R3827 72797918 R3X28B1R8J R,METAL OXIDE 1.8 OHM 3W

! C409 75006552 E7EPU8220M CE 22 UF 100V C413 75006230 E7ESF3102M CE 1000 UF 25V ! C417 72797696 P4N8FJ113H CMPP 0.011 UF 1.25KV C424 75006614 P4N8FJ271J CMPP 270 PF 1.25KV ! C429 75006229 E7ESF4102M CE 1000 UF 35V ! C433 75006227 E7ESFD220M CE 22 UF 250V C435 72796346 P4J7F3274J CMPP 0.27 UF 250V PMS ! C436 72795810 C0PLRR7B3K CC 0.0012 UF 2KV R C614 75006894 E7EPU5010M CE 1 UF 50V C645 75006661 E7EPU1471M CE 470 UF 10V C802 72795578 C0JBB0713K CC 0.001 UF 2KV B C808 75006895 E7ESTD010M CE 1 UF 250V C3011 75006428 E7ESF2222M CE 2200 UF 16V ! C3803 72794401 P2122B334M CMP 0.33 UF 275V ECQUL C3810 72797083 C03L0R7E3K CC 0.0015UF 2KV R ! C3814 72795579 CD39E0MQ3M CC 0.0047UF 250V ! C3815 75006228 E7EWHC681M CE 680 UF 200V ! C3816 72794399 C0PLRR713K CC 0.001 UF 2KV R ! C3817 75006347 E7ESF2332M CE 3300 UF 16V ! C3818 75006348 E7EPU54R7M CE 4.7 UF 50V ! C3820 72796328 E61SFC221M CE 220 UF 200V ! C3821 75006428 E7ESF2222M CE 2200 UF 16V ! C3822 75006230 E7ESF3102M CE 1000 UF 25V ! C3824 75006224 E7ESF3222M CE 2200 UF 25V C5818 75006348 E7EPU54R7M CE 4.7 UF 50V

D402 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D403 72794489 D97U05R61B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ5.6B T-77 D405 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC D406 72794488 D2WT011E10 DIODE SILICON 11E1-EIC ! D407 72794472 D2WTAU02A0 DIODE SILICON AU02A-EIC D408 72794488 D2WT011E10 DIODE SILICON 11E1-EIC D410 72794488 D2WT011E10 DIODE SILICON 11E1-EIC D411 72794471 D97U03001B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ30B T-77 D412 72794471 D97U03001B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ30B T-77 D414 72794478 D97U06R81B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ6.8B T-77 D417 72794489 D97U05R61B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ5.6B T-77 ! D418 72794472 D2WTAU02A0 DIODE SILICON AU02A-EIC ! D420 72794472 D2WTAU02A0 DIODE SILICON AU02A-EIC D601 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D602 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D603 72794487 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77 D604 72794487 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77 D605 72794487 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77 D606 72794487 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77 D801 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D802 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D803 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D2201 72796482 0021E2Q140 LED LTL-1CHEE-002A D2303 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D2304 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

RESISTORS

CAPACITORS

DIODES

K3-1

Page 69

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

DIODES

D3002 75004679 D2LXN40020 DIODE SILICON 1N4002-F D3003 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC D3004 72794490 D97U06R21B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ6.2B T-77 D3005 72797301 D28XQS04N0 DIODE SCHOTTKY 11EQS04N-TA2B5 D3006 72797312 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON RU3AM-EIC D3007 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D3008 72794490 D97U06R21B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ6.2B T-77 D3801 72794489 D97U05R61B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ5.6B T-77 D3802 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3803 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3804 72794477 D97U01501B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ15B T-77 D3805 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3806 72794483 D2WXN49370 DIODE SILICON 1N4937 ! D3807 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3808 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC D3809 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 ! D3810 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3811 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC D3812 72795541 D97U01801B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ18B T-77 D3813 72794483 D2WXN49370 DIODE SILICON 1N4937 D3814 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3815 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3816 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3817 72795626 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D3818 72794483 D2WXN49370 DIODE SILICON 1N4937 ! D3819 72794480 D28T21DQN9 DIODE SCHOTTKY 21DQ09N-TA2B1 ! D3820 72794480 D28T21DQN9 DIODE SCHOTTKY 21DQ09N-TA2B1 ! D3821 72797312 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON RU3AM-EIC ! D3822 72794480 D28T21DQN9 DIODE SCHOTTKY 21DQ09N-TA2B1 ! D3823 72794480 D28T21DQN9 DIODE SCHOTTKY 21DQ09N-TA2B1 ! D3824 72794480 D28T21DQN9 DIODE SCHOTTKY 21DQ09N-TA2B1 ! D3825 72794474 D28F0PRA60 DIODE RECTIFIER 30PRA60-FC D3826 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3827 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3828 72794468 D97U02R21B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ2.2B T-77 D3829 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3830 72794487 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77 D3831 72795542 D97U03R91B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ3.9B T-77 D3832 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D3834 72794465 D97U03301B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B T-77 D4003 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4004 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4005 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4006 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D4007 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D6201 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D6202 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D6203 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D6204 72782547 D28TQS04N0 DIODE SCHOTTKY 11EQS04N-TA1B2 D6205 72782547 D28TQS04N0 DIODE SCHOTTKY 11EQS04N-TA1B2 D6206 72794491 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D8111 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17 D8112 72795897 DD7R0S3550 DIODE SILICON 1SS355 TE-17

! IC301 72783215 I01DP75130 IC AN7513 ! IC302 72783215 I01DP75130 IC AN7513 ! IC401 72795915 I03TD80400 IC LA78040 IC601 75006233 I03FC6327B IC LA76327M-B-MPB-E ! IC2301 72783216 I03FV65650 IC LA6565VR-TLM-E IC2401 75006236 ICQK039740 IC ZR39740HGCF-B0 IC2402 72783776 ICLJ022ET5 IC HY5DU561622ETP-D43 IC2403 75006237 ICRJ004SU0 IC AT24C04N-10SU-2.7 IC2405 75006579 S30S02JF01 MEMORY DATA EN25P16-50HCP IC2406 72783377 I1FF043450 IC CS4345-CZZ ! IC3001 72797594 I1KA98R06A IC KIA78R06API ! IC3002 72795906 I1KA78R050 IC KIA278R05PI ! IC3003 72783917 I03T057740 IC LA5774-E ! IC3004 72795906 I1KA78R050 IC KIA278R05PI ! IC3005 72781440 I07F0C0WF0 IC BA00BC0WFP-E2 ! IC3006 72781440 I07F0C0WF0 IC BA00BC0WFP-E2 IC4001 72783220 ICQK068621 IC ZR36862PQCG-B ! IC4003 72795912 I07F9E00W0 IC BA33E00WHFP-TR ! IC4007 75006349 S5Y701FF01 MEMORY DATA SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE IC4009 72783221 IF9J0161A7 IC M12L16161A-7TG IC4201 72783381 I0QF027500 IC NJM2750M(TE1)

ICS

K3-2

Page 70

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

ICS

IC5801 72783788 I5CF040520 IC SN74LV4052APW IC6201 75006580 S5Y801JM01 MEMORY DATA OEC7176A IC6202 72795101 I9UF032290 IC PST3229NR IC6203 75006615 S5Y901YE01 MEMORY DATA AT24C08AN-10SU-2.7 IC8102 72795922 I17F017530 IC PCM1753DBQR

Q301 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q401 72798322 TA3T01624E TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SA1624E-AA ! Q402 72794561 TCAT03227Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3227_Y-AT ! Q405 72795477 TDUU024990 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SD2499(LB0EC1) Q601 72795479 T8RA030520 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SC3052-T1 Q602 72798324 TAAT012714 TRANSISTOR, SILICON KTA1271_Y-AT Q603 72796425 TPRAB05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR RT1P141C-T112-1 Q604 72796427 TNRAB05004 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR RT1N141C-T112-1 Q605 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q606 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q607 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q824 72795971 TC3F042170 TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SC4217(D,E)-RAC ! Q826 72795971 TC3F042170 TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SC4217(D,E)-RAC ! Q828 72795971 TC3F042170 TRANSISTOR,SILICON 2SC4217(D,E)-RAC Q2201 72794567 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q2301 72783823 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P Q2302 72783824 TAAA1544T0 TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1544T-RTK/P Q2303 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q2304 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q2305 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q2420 72783391 TCAA040754 TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC4075E-Y-RTK/P Q2421 72783391 TCAA040754 TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC4075E-Y-RTK/P Q3001 72795962 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3002 72798324 TAAT012714 TRANSISTOR, SILICON KTA1271_Y-AT ! Q3003 72796092 TAAT01281Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1281_Y Q3004 72795962 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK ! Q3005 72794570 TCAT03209Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3209_Y-AT ! Q3006 72795476 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR, SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT ! Q3008 72795476 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR, SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT ! Q3801 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q3802 72794512 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W) ! Q3803 72795476 TCAT032034 TRANSISTOR, SILICON KTC3203_Y-AT ! Q3804 72783392 TJXG10NK50 FET STF10NK50Z Q3805 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4006 72798315 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106 Q4201 72794567 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q4202 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4203 72794567 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q4204 72798366 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK Q4205 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4206 72794571 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q5801 72783825 T2AA5132E0 FET KTK5132E-RTK/P Q5802 72783825 T2AA5132E0 FET KTK5132E-RTK/P Q5803 72795481 T6RA015300 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SA1530A-T1 Q6201 72795481 T6RA015300 TRANSISTOR SILICON 2SA1530A-T1

! L402 72796405 0221000013 COIL,LINEARITY ELH5L4112N L404 72794527 021679472K COIL 4.7 MH L601 72796407 02167D101K COIL 100 UH L602 72796407 02167D101K COIL 100 UH L604 75006353 02167B220J COIL 22 UH L801 72796407 02167D101K COIL 100 UH L2401 72783383 021AS9224J COIL 0.22 UH L2421 72783384 0216SDR47J COIL 0.47 UH L2422 72783384 0216SDR47J COIL 0.47 UH L3001 72783926 021W0G330M COIL 33 UH L3002 72796513 02167E220K COIL 22 UH ! L3801 72798949 029X000131 COIL,LINE FILTER SS26V-R150162 ! L3802 75002751 028R140035 COIL,DEGAUSS 8R140035 L3803 72796644 02A6B2E0A1 CORE,FERRITE HF70T22*10*14 L4001 75006248 02167B2R2J COIL 2.2 UH L4002 72796088 02AHB9A972 CORE,FERRITE W5T29X7.5X19 L4201 75006354 02167B101J COIL 100 UH L4202 72796502 02167B101K COIL 100 UH L5801 75006354 02167B101J COIL 100 UH L5802 75006354 02167B101J COIL 100 UH L6201 72796400 0216A62R2K COIL 2.2 UH L8102 75006582 02167B1R0K COIL 1 UH L8103 75006582 02167B1R0K COIL 1 UH

TRANSISTORS

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

K3-3

Page 71

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

L8104 75006582 02167B1R0K COIL 1 UH T401 72796055 045013003J TRANS,HORIZONTAL DRIVE ETH14Y47AY ! T3801 72796694 0481300054 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81300054

! J301 72794516 060J131016 HEADPHONE JACK MSJ-2000_AG ! J801 72795491 066F120018 SOCKET,CATHODE RAY TUBE ISMS01S J2201 72795924 060J421036 RCA JACK MTJ-032-05A-30-FE J2202 72795925 060J421037 RCA JACK MTJ-032-05A-32-FE J2203 72795926 060J421030 RCA JACK MTJ-032-05A-31-FE J4201 72796734 060J401102 RCA JACK MSP-251V-05NI-FE-LF J4202 72794518 060J431020 RCA JACK MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF

SW2201 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2202 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2203 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2204 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2205 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2206 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2207 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2208 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2209 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2210 72794688 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

VR401 72795123 V1K62H3BT8 VOLUME,SEMI FIXED NVG6THTB222 VR3801 72796061 V1K63Q2BTE VOLUME,SEMI FIXED NVG6TLTAB471

PCB110 75006616 A5Y901Y110L CRT PCB ASS'Y CCF077A PCB130 75006618 A5Y901Y130L DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DME064A PCBD20 75006625 A5Y901YD20L AV PCB ASS'Y CMF099A PCBDH0 75006627 A5Y901YDH0L DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEF242A

B301 72794357 024HT03553 CORE,BEADS W5RH3.5X5X1.0 B351 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B352 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B353 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B354 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B401 72794357 024HT03553 CORE,BEADS W5RH3.5X5X1.0 B2301 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2302 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2304 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2305 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B2401 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B2402 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B2403 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B2404 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B2405 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B2406 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2407 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2408 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2409 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2410 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2415 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2416 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B2417 72783358 024HC16014 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-601T20 B2418 75006262 024HC13014 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-301T25 B2419 72783358 024HC16014 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-601T20 B2421 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B3001 72794357 024HT03553 CORE,BEADS W5RH3.5X5X1.0 B3801 72794355 024HT03563 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2 B3802 72794355 024HT03563 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2 B4001 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4002 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4003 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4004 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4005 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4006 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4007 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4008 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4009 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4010 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4011 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4012 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4013 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4014 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4015 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT

VARIABLE RESISTORS

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

JACKS

SWITCHES

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-4

Page 72

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

B4016 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4017 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4018 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT B4201 72798931 024AC5600E CORE,BEADS BLM18BB600SN1D B5802 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B5803 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B5804 72783356 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B5805 72783357 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8103 72795787 0246C51024 CORE,BEADS MMZ1608R102CT BT001 72783174 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03) BT002 72783174 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03) CD301 72796873 06CU123801 CORD CONNECTOR CU123801 CD302 72796873 06CU123801 CORD CONNECTOR CU123801 CD601 75006896 122E522101 CORD JUMPER 2E522101 CD602 75006896 122E522101 CORD JUMPER 2E522101 CD801 72796910 06CU82039A CORD CONNECTOR SM1098-009-1A CD802 72798414 WDL6032038 FLAT CABLE AWG26 6C BLACK 320MM CD803 72798396 WBL6030038 FLAT CABLE AWG26 4C BLACK 300MM CD804 75006896 122E522101 CORD JUMPER 2E522101 CP101 72796804 069S290629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-9P CP351 72799049 069W120459 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 213213102W1 CP352 72799049 069W120459 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 213213102W1 ! CP404 72796822 069S450089 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A1561WV2-A5P CP801 72796816 069S320010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2361WV2-2P ! CD3801 75005151 120Q414913 CORD AC BUSH P201-2469-2 CD4002 72783178 06CU2D2202 CORD CONNECTOR CU2D2202 CD4201 75006897 122E522801 CORD JUMPER 2E522801 CD8101 72797046 122F0C1602 CORD JUMPER 2F0C1602 CP2301 72783177 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03 CP2302 72799012 069EV53030 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 00_6232_005_006_800+ CP2303 72799013 069EV63030 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 00_6232_006_006_800+ CP2403 75006267 069J2S004A CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-6029B-1-28Z136 CP2420 72796805 069S290639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-9P ! CP3802 72796821 069S420110 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A1561WV2-2P CP3803 72796768 069D01001A CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 003P-2100 CP3804 72796768 069D01001A CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 003P-2100 CP8001 72796810 069S2D0629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-13P CP8002 72796776 069J7C0599 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-12C CP802A 72796752 067U006049 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-6P CP802B 72796752 067U006049 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-6P CP803A 72796750 067U004029 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-4P CP803B 72796750 067U004029 WIRE HOLDER B2013H02-4P CP8101 72799040 069J7C0589 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE IMSA-9604S-12F CUSD21 72798759 800WFAA006 CUSHION A CUSD22 72795888 800WFAA008 CUSHION C ELD201 72797069 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD ELD202 72797070 124120301A EYE LET XRY20X30BD ! F3801 72796948 081PC05005 FUSE 51MS050L ! FB401 72783642 043214061Y TRANSFORMER,FLYBACK FQI14B007_T FH3801 72794496 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY FH3802 72794496 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY NR2401 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2402 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2403 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2404 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2405 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2406 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2407 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE NR2408 75006268 110P4470M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0470TCE NR2409 75006268 110P4150M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0150TCE OS2201 72783677 077A031003 REMOTE RECEIVER ROM-V3138SR ! RY3801 72796047 0560V20115 RELAY ALKS321 ! SP301 72799165 070N533032 SPEAKER YDP47-6 ! SP302 72799165 070N533032 SPEAKER YDP47-6 TM101 75006362 076D0NQ010 TRANSMITTER 000-103000490 TH3801 72794693 D8EE0B1400 DEGAUSS ELEMENT B59203-S1060-B14 ! TU5801 75006270 0164100022 DIGITAL TUNER ENG36E03KF ! V801 72783643 098Q150414 CRT W/DY A36AKJ13X02 C(M) X601 75006272 100GT3R543 CRYSTAL B03579H006 X2401 72783400 100GA02502 CRYSTAL B25000H006 X4001 72783182 100GT02720 CRYSTAL B27000C005 X6201 72796062 100DA32R01 CRYSTAL DT-26 X6202 75006273 100GT01215 CRYSTAL B12000E011

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-5

Page 73

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

RC...................CARBON RESISTOR

CC...................CERAMIC CAPACITOR

CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP.................POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL.............. METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP..............METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K3-6

Page 74

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Page 75

FILE NO. 810-200712GR

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

COMBINATION FLAT COLOR TELEVISION AND DVD VIDEO PLAYER

MD14H63

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, February, 2007 GREEN

Page 76

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

DVD LOADER DM-3PBF

OPU

SPINDLE/ STEPING/ SLED MOTOR

DVD/CDPD

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

DVD/CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD, VC

TR+/-, FO+/-, MOT_LD+/-, MOT_SLED+/-, MOT_SPDL+/-

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

MOTOR DRIVE

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

HA0~A19, HD0~D15, MEMCS0, RD, WR

FLASH 8M

IC4007

SPINDLE/SLED/ FOCUS/TRACK_PWM, TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN,DRVSB

SPDL_SEN+/-

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

IC4001

ZR36862PQCG-B

P.CON+1.8V P.CON+3.3V

ML, MC, MD,

AMCLK, ABCLK, ALRCLK,

ASDATA0

REG+3.3V+1.9V

IC4003

BA33E00WHFP-TR

STEREO DAC

IC8102

PCM1753DBQR

TV BLOCK CD4002

TX RX P.CON+6V P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.8V

P.CON+3.8V SPDIF

SSCRXD SSCTXD

DVD-H DVD RESET Y C (CVBS)

CVBS

AUDIO-L AUDIO-R ZERO

TV BLOCK CP8101

3 4

6 7 8 9

11 12 13

5 3 1 7 9

F-1

SD_A0~A10

SD_D0~D15

RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,

CAS#, RAS#, CS0#, SD_BA0

16M SDRAM

IC4009

M12L16161A-7TG

F-2

Page 77

DVD BLOCK CP8001

TX RX

SSCRXD SSCTXD

P.CON+6V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.8V

P.CON+3.8V SPDIF

DVD-H

DVD RESET

C (CVBS)

CVBS

AUDIO-L

AUDIO-R

ZERO

CP8002

*A--- AT+5.6V *B--- P.CON+9V *C--- P.CON+5V *D--- P.CON+12V *E--- P.CON+6V *F--- P.CON+3.8V *G--- P.CON+3.3V *H--- P.CON+1.8V *I --- P.CON+2.6V

F-3

OPEN/CLOSE

SKIP REW

*E *C

*F *F

POWER ON/OFF

STOP

PLAY

SKIP FF

MUTE SW

Q4201

CH UP

CH DOWN

OS2201

DIGITAL AUDIO SW

SN74LV4052APW

VOL UP

MUTE SW

Q4203~Q4206

IC5801

3836

X6202

12 MHz

Q4202

DRIVER

5875 59

J4201

1 6

X6201

32.768MHz

TIMER SYSCON MICON

IC6201

OEC7176A

VOL DOWN

74 65 66 47 64

TV BLOCK DIAGRAM

SYSTEM RESET IC6202 PST3229NR

7 31 72 71 89 28 29

8 5

6 4 3 2

J4202

REAR JACK

NJM2750M(TE1)

1 64

AUDIO SW

IC4201

3 79

2 2 2 R

J2203

FRONT JACK

EEP ROM 8K IC6203 AT24C08AN-10SU-2.7

J2202

J2201

DIGITAL BLOCK CP001

V801 CRT

7+3.3V 5 2

1 25 24 22

16 21

27 28 12

10 11

18 17 20 15 14 13

F-4

+9V

TU5801

1312

2015

*H *C

ASIC+1.8V +5V

+2.6V

IF_OUT2 IF_OUT1

IF_AGC SIF/2ND_CVBS

AFT

SD_H CVBS_IN DTV_RESET I2C_DATA I2C_CLK MESSAGE_REQ

AUDIO-R AUDIO-L SPDIF

F S

SPEAKER

SP302

SPEAKER

SP301

Pb OUT Y OUT Pr OUT

HEADPHONE

J301

50 51 57 56 55 59 60

1 44 40

CHROMA

IC601 LA76327M-B-MPB-E

3 14 15 16

4 2

R.OUT G.OUT B.OUT

X601

3.579545MHz

Q402

H.DRIVE

SOUND AMP IC301 AN7513

SOUND+B

SOUND AMP IC302 AN7513

SOUND+B

V.OUTPUT

119

LA78040

Q405

FL OUT

8 6

IC401

FB401

FBT

7 2 3 5

Page 78

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

AC IN

VR3801

+B ADJ.

L3802

DEGAUSS COIL

F3801

Q3801

FEED BACK SW

Q3802

FEED BACK

Q3803

BUFFER

D3807, D3808, D3810, D3811, D3814, D3815, D3816, D3817

RECTIFIER

Q3804

TRANSFORMER SWITCHING T3801

17 14

REG.+2.6V IC3005 BA00BC0WFP-E2

P.CON+5V_D OUT IC3002 KIA278R05PI

Q3006

DRIVER

P.CON+6V_D OUT IC3001 KIA78R06API

REG.+1.8V IC3003 LA5774-E

REG.+3.3V IC3006 BA00BC0WFP-E2

P.CON+5V IC3004 KIA278R05PI

UNREG+3.8V

P.CON+3.3V

DTV_POWER-H

D_P.CON+2.6V

P.CON+D5V

DVD_H

AT+5.6V

SOUND+B

P.CON+6V

P.CON+5V

+1.8V

Q3005

P.CON+9V

P.CON+12V

POWER ON-H

+30V

+25V

FB401

DRIVER

Q3003

DRIVER

Q3004

P.ON SW

R3831, R3832

F-5 F-6

Page 79

DIGITAL MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM

X2401

25MHz

CP2420

SD_CS

SD_WR

SD_CLK

SD_RD

SD_DET

+3.3V

UART0TX

UART0RX

SPI FLASH

IC2405

EN25P16-50HCP

+3.3V

1 3 7

T5 A4 C4 B4

A11 A12

IF_N

SD_H/SEL_SW

CVBS_IN/740_INIT

IF_P

IF_AGC

SPDIF

SIF

SIF AMP

B12

B11

SCL

SDA

EEPROM

IC2403

AT24C04N-10SU-2.7

DTV ASIC

IC2401

ZR39740HGCF-B0

T3R3R2

SDIN

BCLK

LRCK

234

AUDIO DAC

IC2406

CS4345-CZZ

ACLK

910 7

U10

Y OUT

PB OUT

C12

RESETN

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

C11

U13

MSG_REQ

+3.3V

ASIC+1.8V

ADR

DAT

+2.6V

256Mbit DDR SDSAM

IC2402

HY5DU561622ETP-D43

+2.6V

F-7

CVBS_IN/740_INIT

SD_H/SEL_SW27

TV BLOCK

CP2403

IF_N 25

IF_P

SIF

IF_AGC

AFT121

SPDIF20+9V

+3.3V

AUDIO-R18AUDIO-L

SIF/2ND_CVBS 16

Pr OUT

Pb OUT15Y OUT

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

DTV_RESET

+5V

RX 8

+3.3V

AFT0/MSG_REQ

ASIC+1.8V

+5V2

+2.6V

F-8

Page 80

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

Q2302

B4002

R4081

C2341_2

R2340

C2340_2

C4076

R4009

C4053_2

IC4003

R4040

R4080

Q2301

C4071_2

R4070

C2348

R2332

W854

C4011_2

C4009_2

R2360

C2327_2

C4039

B4007

C2346_2

B4005

W817

C4091

R2333

IC4007

CP2301

C2316_2

C4062

C4063_2

C4095

C2328_2

C4001

B4006

C4067_2

C4084_2

W808

CD4002

DVD MT (TOP SIDE)

R2303

DME064A

B4009

R4077

C4068_2

W840

R4051

R4032

C4064

C4083_2

R4054

C4021_2

L4001_1

R4088

R4053

C4070_1

R4087

C4016 C4017

C4077

C4044_2

C2329_2

R4078

C4008

C4078_2

R4061

R4063

R4057

C2303

C2302

R2304

R2334

R4060

R4062

R4052

C4047_1

R4048_1

C4074

C4090_1

C4100_1

C4032

C4088

IC4001

C4089_1

C4096

IC4009

R4008

C4046_1

C4041_1

C8113 C8126

D2303

R2319

C8114

D2304

R2335

C8122

C8125

C4045_1

R8113

R8112

R2307

C4040_1

C2304

R2321

R4038

CP2302

R2324

R2320

R2305

157

105

C8109

W819

R2327

R2326

R2301

C4085

C4050_1

R2308

W824

C4029

R4014

R4069

R4015

R4024

C2313

C4028

C4081

C4038

R4003

IC2301

R4002

R4021

C8107

W820

R4001

X4001

W842

C4031

R4025 C4098 R4026

B4010

R4071

L8103_1

C8112

CP2303

R2337

R2325

R2338

R4004

R4027 R4058

IC8102

R2330

R4019

R4020

C8119_2

L8104_1

C8106

W826

R4086

C2310_2

D8112

D8111

C8110

W818

R2328

C2307

C4069_2

C8121_2

L8102_1

R2351

R2353

C2314_2

R2342

R2350

C8104

R2349

R2352

R2329

R2323

C2358

C2312_1

C2306

R4016

C2360

C2365

R4005

C2359

R2302

R4036

R4037

C8105

C4034

C4035

C4026

C2301

R4012

R4072

D4003

R2339

R4042

R4018

C4105

C8111

R4023

W828

C8120

R4028

R4039

C8108

DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

R2357

R2358

C2305

C2357

R4043

C4030

B4017

C4023

B8103

C4022

R4064

Q4006

R4022

C4019

C4013

B4004

B4014

R4059

D4004

B4015

D4006

C4020

C4080

C2309

C4002

D4007

R2313

W836

R4045

D4005

R2322

R2336

R4090

DME064A

C4086

C4007

C4027

C4004

B4018

C4025

C4005_1

B4001

C4024

B4016

C4010

R4092

R4085

C4033

B4013

C4057

C4014

Q2305

B4012

C4075

C4018

C4066

W850

R2355

C2331

B4011

C4056

B4008

C4003

C4082

C4099

R2348

W843

B4003

R2359

R2309

C4072

C4036

C4097

Q2304

R2347

C4065

R2356

C2315

C2347

W806

R2346

C2332

Q2303

R8101

R2306

R2318

C2326

C4052 C4012

B2301

R2341

B2304

C4015

B2302

B2305

G-1

CP8101_2

G-2

Page 81

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DIGITAL (TOP SIDE) DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)

C2543

C2536

C2444

C2550

C2518

C2517

C2551 C2554

CEF242A

C2535

C2538

R2472

C2476

R2445

C2544

R2446

C2477 C2545

C2540

C2537

R2462

C2529C2530

C2549

B2404

C2410

C2548

R2430

C2404

C2521

C2522

IC2406

B2421

W801

C2498

C2482

R2425 R2426 R2460

L2401

R2458

C2480

C2541

NR2409

C2481

B2406

C2468

C2460

C2461

C2463

C2443

C2509

C2441

C2492 C2493 C2494

C2495

C2469

C2462

R2414

C2470

B2417

R2415

C2471

IC2402

C2465

C2464

C2442

C2510 C2511

B2418

C2496

B2419 C2497

R2416

R2423

C2582

IC2403

R2436

R2437

R2424

C2466

C2467

CP2420

R2408 R2407

C2514

NR2405

NR2407

C2513

C2512

R2412

R2413

NR2404

NR2406

R2409

C2507

B2415

C2490

R2402

NR2403

NR2402

R2519

NR2401

C2421

C2458

C2459

C2423

C2424 C2425 C2426

C2502

B2410

C2485

R2434

C2428

C2438

R2421

C2430

R2506

C2437

C2501

B2409

C2484

R2422

C2429

C2436

R2435

C2435 C2450

C2427

C2453

C2457

C2500

B2408

C2483

R2503

C2420

C2422

C2452

R2517

C2418

C2434

R2431

C2439

C2413 R2457 R2459

C2454 C2414

C2451

C2433

R2453_1

C2491

C2409

C2449

C2415

C2440 C2448

C2431 C2445

C2446 C2432

C2412

C2408

C2447

R2469

B2402

C2406

R2512

R2465 R2468 R2467

C2531

C2402

R2496

R2504

NTSC

C2472

R2513

C2560C2561

L2422_1

CP2403

R2505

A17

R2405

R2403 R2401 R2404 R2406

R2411 R2410

U17

X2401

C2478

C2552

R2448

R2417

R2429

C2473

IC2401

C2407

R2454 R2455 R2456_1

B2401

C2401

L2421

R2475 R2476

C2508

R2470

B2416

C2556 C2557

R2463

C2553

B2403

R2420

Q2420

C2411

C2546

C2416

C2419

C2533

R2473

C2417

C2403

C2542

R2447 C2475 R2466

C2539 C2479

CEF242A

C2405

B2405

R2497

R2499

R2498

NR2408

R2491 R2490

C2527 C2526

C2525

C2524

Q2421

C2532 R2464

C2520

C2519

C2499

B2407

C2547

C2569

R2449

C2570

C2474

IC2405

R2461

R2450

G-3

G-4

Page 82

Page 83

R3804C3801

Q3801

C4209

C3802

C5808

B5802

B4201

C5813

R4206

C4225

S818X

C4223

C5812

C5820

R4213

C3812 C3808

W826

R5807

C5821

C4227

Q5803

C5810

W838

Q5802 Q5801

S820Y

R5803

R5804

B5803

B5804

C5814

C5815

C5817

Q4202

R4202

R4205

R4203

R4204

C4202

C4204

B5805

R4201

C5801

IC5801

C3805

R4220

R4216

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

AV/CRT (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

Q4206Q4205

Q601

R605

R603

C636

CMF099A

R5801

R4212

R4218

C4207

C4220

IC4201

C4211

C4210

R622

R4217

C4213

R614 R615 R617

R613

C633

R3805

R3806

Q3805

R3027

R3026

IC3005

R3028

IC3006

R3823

R3034

R3824

C3026

S821Y

C3018

C3012

R3032

C3032

C3024

R3035

C3030

R3040

R3036R3037

D3007

W863

C3037 R3001

R3014

Q3001

R3019

R3023

R3017R3018

R4211

C4217

C3021

S821X

R3021

C4219

Q3004

C4205

C4218

Q4201

C4208

C4212

C616

C632

Q603

C612

C4206

R4219

R623

R624

Q4204

C638

C626

C627

S818Y

C629

C635

R619

R4207

C604

C631

R628

Q4203

C628

C630

R620

R4208

IC601

C624

R621

C639

R639

R616

C618

R611

R638

W850

C617

R612

C621

R636

R607

R618

C622

R634

R637

C623

R632

Q607

C625

Q605

C642

C3002

C613

C620

R633

Q606

R635

S820X

C602

C605

C611

R631R625

C601

C606

C608

R640

C603

R6221

C6219

R6219

R6220

C6220

C6213

R6208

R602

R6209

R6210

R601

R6214

R6213

R6237

C607

C6214

C610

Q6201 R6202

CCF077A

C3004

C6224

C6223

C6221

C6222

R6201

R6205

C6212

C6206

C6211

R811 R802

C6233

C6207

C6208

C6210

C6209

R3010

C3001

R6234

R6227

R6232

C805

C6228

C6229

R6203

R6236

C804

C3006

C6226

C6225

IC6201

C6239

R815

R3012

R6226

C6227

R6225

R6228

C6205

R3013

R3016

R6207

C6215

C808

R819

C6230

R6233

R818

R6230

C6231

R803

R3011

R6211

Q604

W849

R6204

R820

R3008

C6234

R6229

C6237

C6236

R807

C6235

R6217 R6216

C6238

IC6202

R6223

C803

R801

C6201

IC6203

Q2201

R2204

R2205

R2208

R6212

R2211

R2209

R2206

R2210

R2212

R2213

G-7

R431

R427

C419

R3029

C404

R609

R3031

R305

R3030

R307

C308

C304

R306

R308

C314

C312

C315

R311

R304

R303

Q301

R302

B354

B353

B352

B351

R2215

R2214

C2201

C2205

C2206

G-8

Page 84

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

LOADING MOTOR (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

SW1

LOADING MOTOR (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

CD2302

SOLDER SIDE

CD2301

SW2

M2602

M2601

G-9

G-10

Page 85

ABC D E F GH

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

S809X

220016V MHE_P

W811

W827

P.CON+6V_D OUT IC

IC3001 KIA78R06API

1234

C3013

W837

P.CON+5V_D OUT IC

IC3002 KIA278R05PI

1234

R3009

470 1/4W

10010V YK_P

C3015

OUTIN SWGND

6.37.5

5.0

R3007

390 1/4W

R3008

R3011

22016V YK_P

R3010

10K

SWGNDOUTIN

5.005.08.0

R3012

R3013

2.2K

3.2

10K

4.8

R3014

R3016

2.2K

DTV.P.ON_SW Q3002 KTA1271_Y

5.0

4.2

22K

330

R3015

4.2 Q3001

KRC102SRTK

1/4W

DTV.P.ON_SW

FROM POWER

UNREG+8V

UNREG+12V

GND

UNREG+5V

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP

CP8001

(CD4002)

A2001WV2-13P

GND(D)

GND(M)

P.CON+6V

P.CON+5V

UNREG+3.8V

GND(A)

SPDIF

SSCRXD

SSCTXD

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

CP8002

(CP8101_2)

IMSA-9604S-12C

CVBS

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

AUDIO-R

ZERO

DVD RESET

DVD-H(GND)

C3011_1

R3003

1.8 3W

S813X

C3001

0.1 B

W831

C3004

C3002

150P CH

470P CH

R3005_1

P.CON+5V_D

DVD_SPDIF

DVD_DATA_OUT

DVD_DATA_IN

4.7K 1/4W

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_CLK

DVD_RDY

DVD_C

DVD_Y

ZERO

DVD_RESET

D3002

1N4002-F

HS3001

763WAAA070

C3006

0.001 CH

(AV PCB)

R3021

10K

D3005

11EQS04N

+5V REG.

Q3008

KTC3203_Y

R3001

680

C3037

REG.+1.8V IC IC3003 LA5774-E

1.3 1.2 0 2.25 7.35

S821XS821Y

D3008

FBON/OFF

R3017

R3018

C3019

0.47 B

HS67 HS3002 763WAAA070

MTZJ6.2B

GND V_OUT V_IN

D3007

SK34A

100010V YK_P

C3018

R3019

680

1.5K

DRIVER Q3003 KTA1281_Y

8.0 7.3

L3001

0.6

R3022

4.0

12345

33uH7313N

C3020

S803X

P.CON+12V

P.ON SW

1K 1/4W

Q3004

KRC102SRTK

P.CON+5V OUT IC

IC3004

KIA278R05PI

IN OUT GND SW 1234

8.0 5.0 0 5.0

22016V YK_P

C3022

W836

L3002

100010V YK_P

C3021

0.47 B

HS3003

763WAAA070

R3025

220 1/4W

1.25 2.6 0 6.0 3.3

R3026

22uH TSL0808

R3027

R3028

10010V YK_P

C3023

R3029

R3031

REG.+2.6V IC

IC3005 BA00BC0WFP

V_ADJ GNDV_OUT V_IN V_C

1.2K +-1% C3024

0.1 B

820 +-1%

C3025

120

6.3V 470

YK_P

R3030

10K

C3027

C3026

0.33 B

R3032

12K

C3010

2.2K

10010V YK_P

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

22016V YK_P

R3033_1

4.7 3W

12456

(W065)

B3001

W863

D3003

1N4005-EIC

R3034

R3038_1

680 1/4W

DRIVER Q3005 KTC3209_Y

9.011.9

9.6 R3039

100 1/4W

1050V YK_P

C3028

C3039

C3012

REG.+3.3V IC

IC3006 BA00BC0WFP

V_ADJ GNDV_OUT V_IN V_C

R3035

3.9K +-1%

R3036

1.8K +-1%

270

R3037

4716V KA_P

R3023

3.3K

DRIVER Q3006 KTC3203_Y

3.6

C3030

0.1 B

C3029

6.3V

470

D3004

C3031

YK_P

5.08.0

10016V YK_P

C3033

10010V YK_P

C3032

0.33 B

C3034

MTZJ6.2B

P.CON+9V

1025V KA_P

12456

4.85.63.31.2

R3040

D3006

RU3AM-EIC

C3035_1

10016V KA_P

AT+5.6V

TO TUNER

D_P.CON+5V

P.CON+3.3V D_P.CON+2.6V

GND

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

DVD_SPDIF

FROM/TO CHROMA/IF

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V

8.5VREG

DVD_Y

DVD_C

P.CON+12V

TO DEFLECTION

P.CON+5V

FROM/TO MICON

DTV_POWER-H

DVD_H

P.CON+5V

AT+5.6V

POWER_ON_H

DVD_DATA_OUT

DVD_DATA_IN

DVD_RESET

DVD_CLK

DVD_RDY GND

TO IN/OUT

P.CON+5V_D P.CON+12V

P.CON+9V

AT+5.6V

P.CON+5V

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

ZERO

GND

PCBD20 CMF099

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

DURING PLAYBACK.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

ABC D E F GH

H-2H-1

Page 86

ABC D E F GH

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SCLK

CENTER LED

CAP-FWD

CAP-LIMIT

1SS133

(AV PCB)

DVD_CLK

DVD_DATA_IN

D6203

SDATA

DVD CLK

REMOCON-IN

DUMMY-V.SYNC

REMOCON

R6216 10K

R6217 10K

0.4750V KA_P

C6217

150V YK_P

C6216

OSD_R

DVD_DATA_OUT

R6218_1

1SS133

DVD DATA IN

DVD DATA OUT

HEAD.AMP.SW

ENV-CMP-IN

COLOR ROTARY

BACKUP+5V

10010V YK_P

C6218

OSD_G

R6220

22 1/4W

R6219

C6219 220P CH

0 4.920

VIDEO-H.SW

X-RAY

OSD_B

C6221 220P CH

C6220 220P CH

616263646566676869770717273747576777879880

HI-FI-H.SW

OSD_BLK

R6221 4.7K

C6223 100P CH

C6222 220P CH

V-SYNC

OSD OUT1

V REC START H

50 TAB SW

49 OSD-VSS

48 DVD RESET

33 NC

32 CHROMA P.-H

31 DTV RESET

DEGAUSS_H

DIGITAL SELECT-H

LDM CTL

DIGITAL_SLECT_H

DEGAUSS_H

R6222_1

4.7K 1/4W

4.59 0 2.09 2.07 2.09 4.95 0 04.5

H/C-SYNC

STANDBY-H

NCNC NCNCNC NCNCNCNCNC

NUA

CVIN

PROTECT

H_CONTROL

PROTECT

H_CONTROL

R6223

C6224

100P CH

C6226 220P CH

C6225 0.001 B

HLF

VHOLD

DVD POWER ON-H

DTV_P.ON_H

VCR-POWER

DTV_POWER-H

C6227

0.1 B

R6225 10K

R6226 10K

515253545556575859

OSD-VCC

SD-IN(MONI)

NUB

OSC-OUT2

OSC-IN2

CLKSEL

REC MUTE-H

SPDIF SW

VSS

X-OUT(12MHz)

X-IN(12MHz)

VCC

XC_OUT(32KHz)

XC_IN(32KHz)

RESET-L

AUDIO SW 2

AUDIO SW 1

4.9000NC4.9000000000004.81000

POWER_ON_H

SW1

SW2

SERVICE

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

TV-POWER

C6228

R6227

3.3

4.91

2.26

2.33

4.96

2.25

2.15

4.98

2.9

4.97

4.95

3.4

FROM/TO IN/OUT

SCL

SDA

I2C_OFF

REMOCON

KEY_A

KEY_B

POWER_ON_H SW1

R6232

C6233

0.1 B

R6228

4.7K

L6201

2.2uH

R6230

R6229

33K

W849

C6229

X6202

100GT01215

12MHZ

X6201

100DA32R01

32.768KHZ

470P CH

R6233

2.7K

R6234

C6230 20P CH

C6231 18P CH

C6234 18P CH

C6235 18P

C6236 22P CH

C6237 20P CH

S809Y

RESET

CHROMA_POWER_H

C6238

0.01 B

SD_CVBS

DVD_H

SPDIF_SW

AT+5V

BACKUP+5V

D6205

11EQS04N

D6204

11EQS04N

SW2 AT+5V

FROM/TO CHROMA/IF

OSD_BLK

OSD_B

OSD_G

OSD_R

SDA SCL CHROMA_POWER_H

H_CONTROL

PROTECT

VD SD_CVBS

FROM DEFLECTION

X-RAY

E0REAK

FROM/TO POWER

DEGAUSS_H

POWER_FAIL

FROM/TO REGULATOR

GND

DVD_RESET

POWER_ON_H

DVD_CLK

DVD_DATA_IN DVD_DATA_OUT

P.CON+5V

AT+5.6V

DVD_H

DTV_POWER-H DVD_RDY

FROM/TO SOUND AMP

A_MUTE

POWER_ON_H

VOL_PWM

FROM/TO TUNER

DTV_RESET

AFT_MAIN

SPDIF_SW

SPDIF_MUTE_H

DEGI_ST_L

DIGITAL_SLECT_H

SCL

SDA

PCBD20 CMF099

SDA

R6210

3.3K

DVD RDY

AFT(MONI)

X-RAY/E0 REAK

4.98

R6211 4.7K

C6215 1 B

SCL

100

R6213

100

R6214

NC NCNCNCNCNCNCNCNC

IIC-CLK1

IIC-DATA1

KEY 2

KEY 1

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 293 30

4.9822.5000000

R6212 4.7K

KEY_A

KEY_B

RESET

D6202

C6201

0.01 B

A_MUTE

SPDIF_MUTE_H DVD_RESET

I2C_OFF

DEGI_ST_L

POWER_FAIL

R6236

4.7K

E0REAK DTV_RESET

8K EEP ROM IC IC6203

AT24C08AN-10SU-2.7

1234

VSS

5.1

R6203

C6239

0.1 B

C6202

10010V YK_P

R6201

10K

R6202

10K

4.4

C6205

C6204

10010V YK_P

3.2

VCC

TEST

3.2

SCL

3.2

5678

SDAA0

BUFFER Q6201

5.1

2SA1530A

R6205 10K

C6206 100P CH

C6207 100P CH

3.3K

R6204

C6208 100P CH

C6209 100P CH

C6210 100P CH

C6211 100P CH

C6212 100P CH

TIMER SYSCON MICON IC

SCL

SDA

IC6201

OEC7176A

R6206_1

4.96

4.7K 1/4W

4.95

4.96

3.29

2.44

2.45

0.97

2.32

4.96

R6237

4.9

1.6

3.9

DVD_RDY

VOL_PWM

4.750V KA_P

C6240

4.7K

D6201

D6206

1SS133

000004.31 0 3.84 3.84 0 0 0 4.9 0.95 4.9 0

818283848586878889

REEL-T

REEL-S

CAP FULL

FF/REW-L

POWER_FAIL_L

IIC OFF

CAP-FG

AMP-VSS

MESSERGE_REQ_IN

DRUM FG/PG

90919293949596979899

AMP-VREFOUT

AMP-VREFIN

CTL-

CTL+

AMP C

CTL AMP-OUT

100

EOT

MSSEN-A

MSSEN-B

110

R6207

1.5M

SYSTEM RESET IC

IC6202 PST3229NR

4 5

NC NC

4.7K

R6208

DRUM-PWM

BOT

CAP-PWM

HI-FI-ENV

NCNCNCNCNCNC

C6214

100P CH

C6213

100P CH

R6209

3.3K

VOL PWM

81 VCR_A_MUTE

82 TV_A_MUTE

83 SPDIF MUTE-H

98 AMP-VCC

99 ANALOG VCC

100 E0 REAK

VIDEO-ENV

AFT_MAIN

3.2 123

3.2

IN OUTGND

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

ABC D E F GH

H-4H-3

Page 87

ABC D E F GH

CHROMA/IF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FROM/TO REGULATOR

P.CON+9V

P.CON+5V

DVD_Y

DVD_C

8.5VREG

P.CON+12V

FROM/TO DEFLECTION

V.OUT

AFC

ACL

H.OUT

FROM/TO MICON

SD_CVBS

H_CONTROL

CHROMA_POWER_H

PROTECT

OSD_BLK

OSD_B

OSD_G

OSD_R

SDA

SCL

FROM/TO TUNER

VIDEO_OUT

ANALOG_TUNER_VIDEO

DTV_Y

DTV_C[U]

DVD_Y

P.CON+5V_B

5.6K

R607

CHROMA_IC

IC601

LA76327M-B-MPB-E

R601

SCL

SDA

OSD_BLK

OSD_B

OSD_G AFC

OSD_R

FRONT_VIDEO

REAR_VIDEO

DTV_C[U]

ANALOG_TUNER_VIDEO

R602

W840

VD P.CON+9V

S816X

R640

C603

DTV_Y

S820X

R603

R605

C602

5.0 PROTECT

Q601 2SC3052

10K

C601

R639

S818Y

(CD4201)

5.0

3.3

5.0

C604

R608

47 1/4W

D601

1SS133

3.3 NC

C606

0.1 B

C607

C605

50515253545556575859

BUS

6061626364

11011

0 3.5

D602

1SS133

0.1 B

CLMP

VIDEO

MIX

COMBSWCOMB

CLMP

RST

10V REG

Q602

KTA1271_Y

R609

0.2

8.65.6

4.7K

S819Y

(CD602)

0.1 B

45464748

CLMP

REG-SW

CLMP

YSW

LPF SW

C608

W835

S819X

(CD602)

(AV PCB)

DVD_C

CHROMA_POWER_H

C610 0.1 B

C611

0.1 B

REG

VXD APC1

TINT

BPF

V/Y

TRAP

SHARPBSSG

OSD

CONTRAST

DRIVE/CUT-OFF

CLMPCLMP CLMPCLMP

5V/8V-REG

789

3.4 0

8.6 2.5 4.3 8.5 2.6 7.8 3.4 3.4

C645

47010V YK_P

C609

10016V KA_P

C612

0.1 B

C613

4.32.54.802.42.42.4 05.0 4041424344

COMBSWCOMB

ACCYC SW

DC REST

OSD

C614_1

0.1 B

Y PIN

ABL/ACL

150V YK_P

R612

R611

4.7M

NCNC

BMO

CONTRAST

BRIGHT

3.3K

P.CON+5V

L601

4706.3V YK_P

C615

6DB AMP

FSC

CLMP

AF/D1 SW

C PIN SW

RGB

COLOR

MATRIX

CLAMP

SYNC SEP

VER

SEP

VER

C/D

VER

RAMP

E/W AMP

12 13 14 15 16

C616

100uH 0607

HOR VCC

VER D/A

R614 100

R613

HOR VCO

1/256

HOR

C/D

AFC1

AFC2

PHASE

SHIFTER

15K

C617

C618

HOR

OUT

R615 100

0.047 B

R616

2.73.53.15.02.63.9 3.7

X-RAY

FBP

R617 100

0.1 B

P.CON+5V_B

33343536373839

100uH 0607

C619_1

680K

0.47 B

30 31 32

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

17 18 19

L602_2

10016V KA_P

L604_1

R637

120

6dB Amp Q607 KTC3875S_Y_RTK

150

R638

C636

22uH 0405

W801

R628

R629_1

220 1/4W

15K

R630_1

5.0

9.0

W850

330 1/2W

4.4

Q603

RT1P141C

4.4

5.00

BUFFER

Q604

RT1N141C

FROM/TO CRT

CP802A B2013H02-6P

GND(SIGNAL)

CLAMP_OFF

(CP802B)

CUT_OFF

R.OUT

G.OUT

B.OUT

PCBD20 CMF099

VIDEO_OUT

SD_CVBS

H_CONTROL

P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V

8.5VREG

P.CON+12V

H.OUT

V.OUT

ACL

0.1 B

100GT3R543

3.579545MHZ

10P CH

0.0056 B

2.2 B

C626

0.47 B

C640_1

C628

0.1 B

C629

C627

10010V YK_P

R625

R623

12K

5.6K

R631

1.94

C630

1.31

C641_1

C631

0.1 B

D603

6dB Amp Q605 KTC3875S_Y_RTK

2216V KANP_P

C642

100P CH

R632

100

R624

10K

C632

MTZJ12B

R633

4.73

1.83

6dB Amp Q606 KTC3875S_Y_RTK

1.15

C633

0.33 B

D605

MTZJ12B

C634_1

D606

MTZJ12B

0.33 B

D604

MTZJ12B

C643_1

2216V KANP_P

R635

10K

10016V KA_P

C635

R636

15K

6.22

2.96

2.02

R626

100 1/2W

0.1 B

270

15K

R634

C639

X601

R621

0.1 B

R618

22K

0.1 B

C623

0.01 B

R620

4.7K +-1%

R619

330

22K

10P CH

C624

R622 5.6K

C625

C620

C621

C622

2.2

2.7

2.5

1.7

5.1

1.5

2.6

5.2

2.4

3.1

C638

7.83

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR.NOTE: THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP IS NON POLAR ONE.

ABC D E F GH

H-6H-5

Page 88

ABC D E F GH

SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(AV PCB)

FROM/TO MICON

VOL_PWM

POWER_ON_H

A_MUTE

FROM POWER

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

GND

R301

68K 1/4W

C301

1050V KA_P

R311

270K

R302

47K

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

C302

FROM IN/OUT

SW_A_OUT_L

SW_A_OUT_R

MUTE SW

Q301

4.750V KA_P

R303

68K

0.6

R304

150V YK_P

C303

47K

C305

100016V YK_P

0.6

1.3 1.3

3.8 3.8 1234

SOUND AMP IC(L CH)

IC301 AN7513

150V KA_P

C306

7.6 7.6

5678

C312

0.1 B

4.0 4.0

C313

150V KA_P

0.6

1234

SOUND AMP IC(R CH)

IC302 AN7513

5678

C315

0.1 B

330P CH

R307

10K

C308

R308

10K

W825

C314

B301

2206.3V YK_P

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

FROM/TO SPEAKER

C317

2206.3V YK_P

R309

270 1/2W

R310

270 1/2W

HEADPHONE JACK

J301

MSJ-2000_AG

330P CH

C316

W829

W830

C304

0.1 B

R305

8.2K R306

8.2K

B351 FCM1608KF-102T02

B352 FCM1608KF-102T02

CP352 213213102W1

SP OUT L+

SP OUT L-

CU123801

B353 FCM1608KF-102T02

B354 FCM1608KF-102T02

CP351

213213102W1

SP OUT R+

SP OUT R-

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

CD302

CD301

CU123801

L CH SPEAKER

8 OHM

R CH SPEAKER

8 OHM

SP302

YDP47-6

SP301

YDP47-6

PCBD20 CMF099

ABC D E F GH

H-8H-7

Page 89

ABC D E F GH

GND

AT+5V

POWER_ON_H

REMOCON

R2201

AT+5V

100 1/4W

KEY_A

FRONT_A_IN_R

FRONT_A_IN_L

S816Y

C2201

C2202_1

150P CH

4716V YK_P

R2202_1

2.2K 1/4W

82K

R2214

5.0

2.2K 1/4W

R2215

D2201

5.0

R2203_1

82K

220

R2204

Q2201

KRC103SRTK

SW2201

POWER ON/OFF

SW2202

CH DOWN

LTL-1CHEE-002A

R2205

560

EVQ21505R

OPEN/CLOSE

CH UP

EVQ21505R

R2206

560

SW2203

SW2204

C2205

R2208

820

EVQ21505R

470P CH

C2206

R2209

820

470P CH

R2210

1.2K

STOP

SW2205

EVQ21505R

SW2206

VOL UP

EVQ21505R

R2211

1.2K

NC NC

HNC

FRONT VIDEO JACK

J2201 MTJ-032-05A-30-FE

YELLOW

OS2201

ROM-V3138SR

Vout

B+

GND

R2212

1.8K

PLAY

SW2207

EVQ21505R

SW2208

VOL DOWN

EVQ21505R

HNC

FRONT AUDIO JACK

J2202 MTJ-032-05A-32-FE

WHITE

SW2209

SKIP FF

FRONT AUDIO JACK

R2213

3.9K

SW2210

SKIP REW

EVQ21505R

HNC

J2203 MTJ-032-05A-31-FE

RED

EVQ21505R

IN/OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FROM/TO SOUND AMP

SW_A_OUT_L

SW_A_OUT_R

FROM/TO TUNER

DTV_AUDIO_R

DTV_AUDIO_L

SPDIF-134

FROM REGULATOR

P.CON+5V

AT+5.6V

P.CON+12V

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

ZERO

P.CON+9V

(AV PCB)

L4202

100uH 0405

C4205

B4201

0.1 B

C4206

0.1 B

C4207

0.1 B C4208

0.1 B

MSP-251V-05NI-FE-LF

100P CH

COAXIAL

J4201

C4209

R4219

100

C4210

0.0033 B

C4211

C4212

0.1 B

C4213

0.1 B

0.0033 B

SW1

FRONT_A_IN_R

SW2

C4204

0.1 B

R4218

330

R4217

330

BLM18BB600SN1

68K

R4206

DVD_A_OUT_R

FRONT_A_IN_L KEY_B

DVD_A_OUT_L

L4201_1

100uH 0405

C4202

R4201

2.2K

0.022 B

R4202

R4203

1.5K

3.3K

4.9

D AUDIO DRIVER

Q4202

1.2

R4204

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R4205

220

1.6

4.8

3.2

4.8

3.2

4.8

AUDIO_SW IC IC4201

NJM2750M(TE1)

IN1a

2345678

CNT1

IN2a

CNTT2 IN3a

IN4a

IN1b

IN2b

GND

OUTa

Vcc

Vref

OUTb

IN3bIN4b

C4215

10016V YK_P

4.8 R4211

100K

9.6

4.8

C4216

4.8

1025V KA_P

4.8

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

4.8

R4212

100K

C4217

C4219

0.1 B

C4220

0.1 B

C4218

GND

P.CON+5V_D

FROM/TO MICON

KEY_A

KEY_B

POWER_ON_H

SCL

SDA

REMOCON

I2C_OFF

SW1

SW2

AT+5V

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

3.81

MUTE SW Q4201 KRC103SRTK

R4207

5.2

R4209_1

4.750V KA_P

C4214

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

R4208

5.2

3.3K

MUTE SW. Q4203 KRC103SRTK

MUTE SW. Q4204 KRA101SRTK

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R4210_1

1K 1/4W

MUTE SW

Q4206

MUTE SW

Q4205

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

P.CON+9V

R4216

82K

R4220

82K

REAR A/V JACK(STEREO)

J4202

MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF

R4214

2.2K

R4213

234

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.2K 1/4W

C4223

470P CH

C4225

S818X(CD4201)

470P CH

C4227

100P CH

H1NCH1H2

I2C_OFF

SDA

SCL

TEST POINT

CP101

A2001WV2-9P

GND

I2C SCL

I2C SDA

I2C OFF

P.CON+9V

AUDIO OUT L

AUDIO OUT R

NC DVD_VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

PCBD20 CMF099

ABC D E F GH

H-10H-9

Page 90

ABC D E F GH

DTV_DATA

SDA

DTVCLOCK

SCL

CONVERT

KTK5132E

5.2 3.3

LEVEL

Q5801

2.9

DIGITAL TUNER W/NTSC_MPX

TU5801 ENG36E03KF

3.35.2 LEVEL

CONVERT

2.9

Q5802

KTK5132E

C5803

4706.3V YK_P

L5801_1

P.CON+5V

100uH 0405

+30V

+30V 11

R5803

SDA

100

R5804

SCL

2.25.05.0

100

SCL

SIF

1.14 5.03

C5809

AFT_MAIN

V_OUT

1006.3V YK

+5V

B5804

FCM1608KF-102T02

C5815

C5813

0.1 B

C5808

0.1 B

C5810

0.1 B

B5802

FCM1608KF-102T02

+5V 9

B5803

L5802_1

100uH 0405

31.1

FCM1608KF-102T02

OOB

+5V 1

22 23

NCNC

AFT

TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

IF_P

20P CH

C5817

(AV PCB)

IF_N

IF AGC

20P CH

NCNCNC

IF OUT

24 25

C5814

0.1 B 31

SIF

FROM/TO IN/OUT

DTV_AUDIO_L

DTV_AUDIO_R

SPDIF-134

FROM/TO CHROMA/IF

DTV_Y

DTV_C[U]

ANALOG_TUNER_VIDEO

VIDEO_OUT

FROM/TO MICON

DEGI_ST_L

SCL SDA

AFT_MAIN

DTV_RESET

SPDIF_SW

SPDIF_MUTE_H

DIGITAL_SLECT_H

FROM POWER

+30V

D_P.CON+5V

SPDIF_MUTE_H

SPDIF_SW

DVD_SPDIF

SPDIF-134

1.6 01.6 00000 1

2345678

P.CON+5V

VCC

DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC

IC5801 SN74LV4052APW

C5801

0.1 F

C5802

476.3V KA_P

13141516

NC000 00003.2

Inhibit

VEE

101112

100

R5801

GND

R5806

4.7K 1/4W

Q5803

2SA1530A

3.3

3.9

DEGI_ST_L

C5820

0.1 B

R5807

2.2K

(CP2403)

FROM/TO AV OUT

CP001

C5812

0.1 B

GND

D_P.CON+5V

D_P.CON+2.6V

34567

S803Y

181/2W

GND

R3002

ASIC+1.8V

MESSAGE_REQ

C5821

0.1 B

D_P.CON+3.3V

RX (DTV_MAIN)

TX (DTV_MAIN)

DTVCLOCK

I2C0CLK

I2C0DATA

101112

S820Y

DTV_RESET

DTV_AUDIO_L

Y OUT

Pr OUT

1314151617181922021222324

Pb OUT(C)

SIF(2nd CVBS)

AUDIO OUT L

SIF

DTV_Y

DTV_C[U]

DTV_RESET

DTV_DATA

R5808_1

4.7K 1/4W

P.CON+9V

DTV_AUDIO_R

AVCC+9V

SPDIF OUT

AUDIO OUT R

B5805

FCM1608KF-151T06

NCNC

GND

IF AGC

AFT

IF OUT1

GND

IF OUT2

252627

SD-H

CVBS_IN

W803

DIGITAL_SLECT_H

S817YS817X

VIDEO_OUT

C5818_1

4.750V YK_P

FROM/TO REGULATOR

DVD_SPDIF

P.CON+5V D_P.CON+5V

P.CON+9V D_P.CON+2.6V P.CON+3.3V

GND

PCBD20 CMF099

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

ABC D E F GH

H-12H-11

Page 91

ABC D E F GH

DEFLECTION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

V.OUTPUT IC IC401 LA78040

AMP

PUMP UP

R407

6.8K 1/4W

C404

0.022 B

W828

FROM REGULATOR

P.CON+5V

W824

R408_1

1234567

D406

11E1-EIC

R411_1

5.6K 1/4W

27K 1/4W

R413

C406

R414

560 1/4W

1050V YK_P

1.5 1/2W

R420

39K 1/4W

R418

1.5 1/2W

R403

115.0

56K 1/4W

R401

0.56 2W

22K 1/4W

C402

2.2100V YK_P

R402

R404

D403

MTZJ5.6B

D402

1SS133

47K 1/4W

TP401

1N4005-EIC

C403_1

1016V KA_P

C401

1016V KANP_P

D405

H.DRIVE Q402 KTC3227_Y

17.3

0.4

R419

150 2W

R409

W876

NC NC

MMTS

0.01100V

C408

2250V MHE_P

C412

R417

470 1/2W

D408

11E1-EIC

+-1%

4.7K

18K

1/4W

R412

1/4W

+-1%

R416

15K

1/4W

CURRENT DET. Q401

2SA1624E

FROM POWER

GND

UNREG+12V

FROM/TO CHROMA/IF

V.OUT

AFC

ACL

H.OUT

TO MICON

X-RAY

E0REAK

10035V MHE_P

C410

C413

HS26V HS401

763WAAA075

T401_1

ETH14Y47AY

+-1%

C409

THERMAL PROTECTION

GNDVCC

100025V MHE_P

S813Y

W833

D407

AU02A-EIC

22100V YK_P

4.025.0 12.002.04.0 25.0

10035V MHE_P

C414

B401

W5RH3.5X5X1.0

W818

D411

D412

R426

100 1/4W

HS402

763WAA0165

D410

11E1-EIC

0.1

HS8V

MTZJ30B

2.8

R427

D414

MTZJ6.8B

W894

FL OUT Q405 2SD2499(LBOEC1)

R428

220 2W

R431

1.2K

R429

C421

R433

(AV PCB)

4716V KA_P

C419

R436

560 1/2W

0.1 B

R438

R439

560 1/2W

C417_1

W897

W808

680 1/2W

R442

VR401

R443

0.0111.25KV MPP

680 1/2W

2.2K METAL

1K 1/2W

C424_3

C426

270P1.25KV

R445

R446

0.22100V MKT

56K

100K

1/2W

D417

MTZJ5.6B

C429

100035V MHE_P

W815

R448_1

3.9K 1/4W

D418

AU02A-EIC

R449

11W

R450_2

FB401_2

(19/14F)

FQI14B007_T COL

VIDEO

AFC

GND

E25

TERHEA

GND

E12

D420

AU02A-EIC

6.8 3W

ELH5L4112

C435

FROM/TO DY

A1561WV2-A5P

W821

L402

R454

1K 1W

C436

0.00122KV R

0.27250V PMS

TO CRT

CP803A

B2013H02-4P

180V

HEATER

L404

C438

R455_1

(CP803B)

GND

CP404

4.7mH 0909

1250V MHE_P

33 1W

ANODE

FORCUS

SCREEN

CD801 SM1098-009-1A

FROM/TO CRT

V801

A36AKJ13X02 C(M)

(CP801)

175

TO CRT

GND

ABL

C434

0.1100V MKT

R452

39K 1/2W

C433

22250V MHE_P

HEATER

PCBD20 CMF099

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

ABC D E F GH

H-14H-13

Page 92

ABC D E F GH

FOCUS

FROM CHROMA/IF

(CP802A)

CP802B B2013H02-6P

CUT OFF

GND

R.OUT

G.OUT

B.OUT

CLAMP_OFF

FROM DEFLECTION

CP803B

(CP803A)

B2013H02-4P

HEATER

GND

180V

CP801

(CD801)

A2361WV2-2P

GND

FROM/TO DEFLECTION

150V KA_P

C801

180V

1250V MHE_P

C808

122.8

TP801

BLUE OUT Q824

L801

2SC4217

100uH 0607

R804

D801

W871

C803

R818

100

7.3

6.9 6.9

15K

R806

1/4W

2.7K

1SS133

R801

220P CH

R807

TP802

2.7K

390

125.1

R808

R819

GREEN OUT

D802

1SS133

R802

W872 W873

100

C805

180P CH

R811

7.3

Q826 2SC4217

15K

TP803

W847

2.7K

390

127.6

R812

7.3

RED OUT Q828 2SC4217

RED GREEN BLUE

15K

C804

6.9

434142

D803

R803

1SS133

2.7K

R820

100

220P CH

R815

390

CRT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(CRT PCB)

R816

2.7K 1/4W R817

SCREEN

CP806

C802

0.0012KV B

13/DVD,19/DVD

J801_1 ISMS01S

121

6.4 9

117

99.6

101.6

2.7K 1/4W

PCB110 CCF077

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

R821

22 1/4W

TM101

000-103000490

ATTENTION

ACCESSORY

BT001

MNAAA(R03)

UM4

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

BT002

MNAAA(R03)

UM4

ABC D E F GH

H-16H-15

Page 93

ABC D E F GH

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

D3803

1SS133

0.2

RELAY DRIVE Q3805 KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.6

10K

R3823

(LKS1af-12V)

RY3801

ALKS321

FH3802

EYF-52BCY

R3807

C3803

1.5M 1/2W

DEGAUSS COIL

L3802

8R140035

AC120V_60Hz CD3801

P201-2469-2

L3803

HF70T22*10*14

WHITE

BLACK

CP3802 A1561WV2-2P

S3802

WHITE

S3801

BLACK

FH3801

EYF-52BCY

F3801

51MS050L

5A125V

5A 125V

C3802

0.012 B

FEED BACK SWITCHING

Q3801

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

5.6K 1/4W

56K 1/2W

R3804

10K

6.0

6.3

5.4

D3801

7.3 13.6

6.3

180

R3805

2.2K

R3806

MTZJ5.6B

FEED BACK Q3802 PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

0.4

BUFFER

Q3803

KTC3203_Y

C3801

0.022 B

METAL

470

+B ADJ

VR3801

R3802

R3801

3.3K 1/4W +-1%

R3803

R3808

0.33275V ECQUL

2.7M 1/2W +-10%

CP3803 003P-2100

6.3

0.4

W842

TH3801

B59203-S1060-B14

COIL,LINE FILTER

L3801

SS26V-R150162

R3811_1

330 1/4W

IS THE LIVE CONNECTIONCAUTION:

CP3804 003P-2100

R3812

D3804

C3805

1SS133

330 1W

W823

MTZJ15B

0.01 B

R3815

560 1/4W

R3816

D3805

10 1/4W

C3806

0.047100V MMTS

1050V YK_P

C3807

C3808

SWITCHING

Q3804

STF10NK50Z

C3809

R3818

330 1/4W

0.01 B

R3817

1K 1/2W

R3819

17W

6.3

0.001500V B

1N4937

D3807

D3808

R3820

D3806

1SS133

D3810

1N4005-EIC

D3811

1N4005-EIC

240

0.33 1W

D3809

1N4005-EIC

D3812

C3810

R3821

68 1/2W

C3811

0.001500V B

MTZJ18B

R3822

1.2M 1/2W B3801

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2

0.00152KV R

HS7V

HS3801

763WAA0293

C3812

0.1 B

D3813

1N4937

C3813

0.001500V B

C3814

D3814

D3815

0.0047250V KX

R3824

10K

D3816

1N4005-EIC

D3817

1N4005-EIC

R3825

1.2M 1/2W

(AV PCB)

R3826

0.22 1W

1N4005-EIC

680200V USR_P

C3815

1N4005-EIC

T3801_1 81300054

TO SOUND AMP

R3827

1.8 3W

4.5V 10

135V

12V

W851

W826

W838

B3802

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2

RU3AM-EIC

D3818

1N4937

D3819

21DQ09N

D3820

21DQ09N

D3802

D3821

C3816

0.0012KV R

D3822

21DQ09N

1SS133

R3828

100 1/4W

C3817

D3823

21DQ09N

D3824

21DQ09N

30PRA60-FC

C3818

330016V MHE_P

W813

D3831

D3825

YK_P

4.7

50V

1K 1/4W

MTZJ3.9B

D3826

1SS133

R3813

C3821

C3822

R3830

1K 1/4W

220016V MHE_P

100025V MHE_P

D3827

C3820_1

1SS133

D3829

C3824

220200V EZ

D3830

MTZJ12B

D3828

D3832

1SS133

220025V MHE_P

MTZJ2.2B

1SS133

R3831

56K 1/2W

R3832

56K 1/2W

W809

D3834

MTZJ33B

GND

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

TO DEFLECTION

UNREG+12V

GND

FROM/TO CHROMA/IF

GND

TO REGULATOR

UNREG+12V

UNREG+8V

GND

UNREG+5V

FROM/TO MICON

POWER_FAIL

DEGAUSS_H

TO TUNER

+30V

R3829

100 1/4W

PCBD20 CMF099

ATTENTION

5A 125V

CAUTION

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

5A 125V(F3800).

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

ABC D E F GH

H-18H-17

Page 94

ABC D E F GH

MPEG/MICON/DSP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

JG001

JG002

JG003

JG004

JG005

JG006

JG007

JG008

JG009

C4105

100P CH

R4036

FROM/TO MEMORY

P.CON+3.3V

GND

(D_GND)

HA0 HA1 HA2 HA3 HA4 HA5 HA6 HA7 HA8

HA9 HA10 HA11 HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15 HA16 HA17 HA18 HA19

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9 HD10 HD11 HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15

MEMCS0

WR SD_A0 SD_A1 SD_A2 SD_A3 SD_A4 SD_A5 SD_A6 SD_A7 SD_A8 SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_D0 SD_D1 SD_D2 SD_D3 SD_D4 SD_D5 SD_D6 SD_D7 SD_D8 SD_D9

SD_D10 SD_D11 SD_D12 P.CON+5V SD_D13 SD_D14 SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMRAS# RAMCAS#

SD_BA0 RAMDQM RAMWE# RAMCLK RAMCKE

R4037

4.7K

C4038

0.01 B

UNREG+3.8V

BOOT2

BOOT1

D4005

DUPTD1

1SS355

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

P.CON+5V

R4039

4.7K

R4038

4.7K

R4032

HA15 DAC_VIDEO_C HA16 DAC_VIDEO_B HA14 DAC_VIDEO_D HA13 HA12 DAC_VIDEO_E HD15 HA11 HD7

HA10 HD14 HA9 HD6 HA8 HD13 HD5

HD12 WR ML HD4 I2C_CLK MC

HD11 HD3 D1_2 HA19 D1_1

HD10 [MJTEC] HA18

HD2 STBY_L HA17 SSCCLK HD9 HSYNC HA7 VSYNC HD1 AIN RDY[I/O[0]] HA6 VDDP-A2 HD8 IAMCLK AMCLK HA5

HD0 IALRCLK ALRCLK HA4 GPAI/O RD AOUT[0] ASDATA0 HA3 HA2 MEMCS0 SPDIF_1 SPDIF HA1 IDGPCI/O[0] HA0 IOGPCI/O[0] RDY[I/O[0]]

R4054

R4053

ATTENTION

SSCTXD

SSCCLK

SSCRXD

JG033

JG032

JG031

R4052

4.7K

D4006

D4007

1SS355

R4051

4.7K R4077

2.2K

R4088

R4087 4.7K

4.7K

C4077

3.3

C4078_2

0.1 F

SSCRXD_1

C4008

0.1 F

C4010

0.1 F

C4013

0.1 F

C4014

0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F C4017 0.1 F

BOOTSEL1

BOOTSEL2

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

JG030

JG029

IRRCV

FPCSTRB

D4004 1SS355

R4078

4.7K

3.3

110

SSCRXD

MEMCS(1)

VDDP

MEMAD(15)

MEMAD(16) MEMAD(14) MEMAD(13) MEMAD(12) MEMDA(15) MEMAD(11) MEMDA(7)

111213141516171819 22021222324

GNDP

3.3 MEMAD(10)

3.3 MEMDA(14)

3.3 MEMAD(9)

3.3 MEMDA(6)

3.3 MEMAD(8)

3.3 MEMDA(13)

3.3 MEMDA(5)

3.3 MEMAD(20)

3.3 VDDP

3.3 MEMDA(12)

3.3 MEMWR#

3.3 MEMDA(4)

1.8 VDDC

2526272829

3.3 MEMDA(11)

3.3 MEMDA(3)

3.3 MEMAD(19)

GNDC

3.3 MEMDA(10)

30313233343536373839

3.3 MEMAD(18)

GNDP

3.3 MEMDA(2)

3.3 MEMAD(17)

3.3 MEMDA(9)

3.3 MEMAD(7)

3.3 MEMDA(1)

3.3 MEMAD(6)

3.3 MEMDA(8)

3.3 MEMAD(5)

40414243444546474849

3.3 VDDP

3.3 MEMDA(0)

3.3 MEMAD(4)

3.3 MEMRD#

3.3 MEMAD(3)

3.3 MEMAD(2)

3.3 MEMCS(0)#

3.3 MEMAD(1)

3.3 MEMAD(0)

GNDP

3.3 VDD-IP

5152

3.3 VDDP

53 545556 57 58 59660 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69770 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79880 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89990 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

3.3

1006.3V KA_P

SD_A4

SD_A3

SD_A5

SD_A2

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

D4003 1SS355

3.3

DUPRD0

DUPTD0

RAMADD(6)

VDDP

3.3

C4018 0.1 F

SD_A6

JG022

JG023

FOCUS_PWM

C4001

R4085 1K

0.0039 B

FS1

FS2

B4014

MMZ1608R102CT

R4063 15K

3.3

PWMCO(0)

GPCI/O(46)

IDGPCI/O(4)

208

207

206

205

RAMADD(1)

RAMADD(0)

RAMADD(7)

3.3

3.303.3

SD_A1

SD_A7

SD_A0

SPINDLE_PWM

B4011

B4009

MMZ1608R102CT

SGND

C4002 0.1 F

R4061 11K

3.3

GNDPWM

VDDPWM

PWMCO(4)

SSCTXD

SSCCLK

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

RAMADD(4)

RAMADD(3)

RAMADD(5)

RAMADD(2)

VDDC

GNDP

RAMADD(8)

1.803.3

C4019 0.1 F

SD_A8

SLED_PWM

TRACK_PWM

TRAY_OPEN

TRAY_CLOSE

B4012

MMZ1608R102CT

C4056

C4003

0.027 B

R4060 11K

R4062 39K

3.3

PWMCO(2)

PWMCO(3)

SLEDPULSE

SPINDLEPULSE

RAMADD(10)

RAMADD(9)

VDDP

GNDC

3.3

C4020 0.1 F

SD_A10

SD_A9

DVD/CD

B4013

MMZ1608R102CT

C4057

180P CH

W840

B4016

C4033 0.1 F

MMZ1608R102CT

3.3

3.2

3.3

GNDP

VDD-IP

ICGPI/O(6)

ICGPI/O(7)

RAMADD(11)

RAMBA(0)

GNDP

RAMCS(0)# RAMBA(1)

3.3

NCNC

RAMCS0#

SD_BA0

CAUTION

TIN_SW

TOUT_SW

(DVD-L/CD-H)

C4096

0.001 B

MMZ1608R102CT

C4032

0.001 B

1006.3V KA_P

C4068_2

3.3

GNDC

VDDP

ICGPCI/O(4)

ICGPCI/O(5)

IDGPCI/O(3)

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC

RAMWE#

VDDP

RAMCAS#

RAMCS(1)#

RAMRAS#

3.3

RAMCAS#

RAMWE#

RAMRAS#

DRVSB

3.1

GPCI/O(32)

IC4001 ZR36862PQCG-B

RAMDQM

3.3

B4017

R4059 100

RAMDQM

CD_LD

DVD_LD

(MUTE-L)

C4088 0.1 F

1.8

3.1

VDDC

CD_LD

AGND1

DVD_LD

AGNDREF

GNDPCLK

PCLK

VDDPCLK

RAMDAT(8)

GNDP

3.3

3.0

3.3

VCC_PLL

GND_PLL

B4004

MMZ1608R102CT

C4022 0.1 F

R4008

100

R4064

RAMCLK

SD_D8

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

DVD/CDPD

(VR_CD)

(VR_DVD)

R4043

10K +-1%

R4022 10K +-1%

1.3

0.3

CD_MD

RESOUT

DVD_MD

RAMDAT(9)

RAMDAT(6)

RAMDAT(7)

3.3

C4023 0.1 F

MMZ1608R102CT

SD_D7

SD_D9

SD_D6

OPU_F

C4004 0.1 F

2.2

VBGAP

VDDP

RAMDAT(10)

3.3

SD_D5

SD_D10

OPU_E

SPDL_SENS+

2.1

2.3

2.4

RAMDAT(5)

RAMDAT(11)

3.3

SD_D11

SPDL_SENS-

3.5

EKF

AGND

160

159

RFN

158

RFP

157

DJTCK / ICGPCI/O(3) / VID(0)

100

RAMDAT(14)

101

GNDP

102

RAMDAT(1)

103

RAMDAT(15)

104

RAMDAT(0)

GNDP

VDDC

RAMDAT(4)

3.3

1.8

3.3

C4024 0.1 F

SD_D4

ARE

ABC D E F GH

(DVD MT PCB)

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

TP4026

TACT_OFFSET

3.3

2.4

2.3

2.4

CHD

DJTO / GPCI/O(30) / VID(1) DJTDI / GPCI/O(29) / VID(2) DJTMS / GPCI/O(28) / VID(3)

GNDC

RAMDAT(12)

RAMDAT(3)

3.3

SD_D12

SD_D3

3.3

C4025 0.1 F

AVDD

VDDP

3.3

SD_D13

2.4

GNDDACBS2

SVDD

AVDD1

IDGPCI/O(2)

GPCI/O(31)

GPCI/O(27) IDGPI/O(1)

ICGPCI/O(2)

GPCI/O(26)

ICGPCI/O(1)

IDGPCI/O(0) ICGPCI/O(0)

GPCI/O(20)

RAMDAT(13)

RAMDAT(2)

101102 103104

100

3.3

SD_D14

SD_D2

CVBS/G/Y

TP4025

RFINN

FACT_OFFSET

1.6

0.1

157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208

GNDDACP

RSET

C/B/U

VDDDAC

Y/R/V CVBS/C VDDDAC

Y/C GNDDACD GNDDACD

GCLK

VDDA

RESET#

GNDA GNDP VDDP

VDDC GNDC

VDDP

GNDP HSYNC VSYNC

AIN

VDDP-A2

AMCLK

GNDP-A2

ABCLK

ALRCLK

GPAI/O AOUT(0) AOUT(1) AOUT(2)

SPDIF

GNDP

VDDP

3.3

SD_D15

SD_D1

C4085 0.001 B

C4086 0.001 B

RFINP

C4005_1

100P CH

B4018

MMZ1608R102CT

VDDPWM

+1.8V +3.3V

1.8

0 0

1.3

1.1

3.3

1.2

1.4

3.3

1.4

0 0

W836

2.6

3.2

1.8

3.3

476.3V

C4069_2

3.3 JG028

3.3

HOME HOME PM16

2.9

(MIC_DET)

3.3

(DJTDO)

3.3

I2C_DAT MD

1.8

(ICETCK)

3.3

(ICETDO)

3.3

(ICETMS)

3.3

(PM11)

TP4017

3.3

TP4018

3.3

R4024 4.7K

3.3

JG024

3.3

0 0

JG020 0 0

GPCI/O[20]

3.3

105106 107108 109110111 112113 114115 116117118 119120 121122 123124125 126127 128129 130131132 133134 135136 137138139 140141 142143 144145146 147148 149150 151152153 154155 156

3.3

ZR36862»¨˝ » 108pin W828

ZR36882»¨˝ » 109pin W830

SD_D0

C4076

476.3V KA_P

C4071_2

VDDAFERF

B4001 MMZ1608R102CT

VDDDAC

(10mA)

R4086

R4042

C4028 0.1 F

4.7K

KA_P

R4090

C4030 0.1 F

R4058

220

B4010

MMZ1608R102CT

(PM1)

C4082

0.1 F

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

2206.3V KA_P

0.1 F

C4075

C4070_1

R4005

75 +-1%

27MHz

X4001

100

100GT02720

C4027 0.1 F

R4072 33 R4019 33 R4020 33 R4021 33

TP4007

W828

C4026 0.1

C4083_2

0.1 F

C4007 0.1 F

R4001

820 +-1%

R4004

R4003

75 +-1%

C4034 8P CH

R4012

18P CH

R4069 4.7K

TP4010

C4029 0.1 F

C4031 0.01 B

IABCLK ABCLK

TP4015

4NC

R4071

TP4016

150

R4014 4.7K

B4006

MMZ1608R102CT

1006.3V KA_P

R4002

75 +-1%

C4035

W842

JG021

(250mA)

476.3V KA_P

C4067_2

75 +-1%

C4081 0.1 F

TP4004

TP4005

2.2K

R4015

R4025 220

R4026 220 R4027 220

C4098

10P CH

R4092

4.7K

LEVEL SHIFT

Q4006

2SK3018T106

C4072

R4016

100

TP4006

R4028

C4011_2

DUPTD1

0.1 F

MMZ1608R102CT

R4045 4.7K

RESET

SYS_MUTE

2.2K

DVD-H

4.7K

R4057

P.CON+3.3V UNREG+3.8V

UNREG+3.8V

1006.3V KA_P

0.1 F

C4012

W817

C4091

B4002

(190mA)

(250mA)

B4003

MMZ1608R102CT

B4005

(130mA)

MMZ1608R102CT

B4015

MMZ1608R102CT

R4023 4.7K

R4018 2.2K

TP4008

TP4009

REG+3.3V +1.9V IC IC4003 BA33E00WHFP

1234567

2.5 4.2 4.2 0 3.3

TP4024

C4052

0.1 F

2206.3V KA_P

C4053_2

100P CH

P.CON+3.3V

(D_GND)

ADJVCC2 VCC1 GND VO1 VO2EN

1.8

R4009

R4080

TP4023

47K

R4070

C4015

4716V KA_P

C4009_2

TP4003

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

SYS_MUTE DVD-H DAC_VIDEO_C DAC_VIDEO_B DAC_VIDEO_D ASDATA0 ABCLK ALRCLK AMCLK MD MC ML RESET P.CON+5V

(RF_GND)

GND

(A_GND)

GND

(D_GND)

GND

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

VDDPWM3.3V TRAY_OPEN TRAY_CLOSE HOME TOUT_SW TIN_SW DVD/CD DRVSB RF OPU_A OPU_B OPU_C OPU_D OPU_E OPU_F VC SPDL_SENSSPDL_SENS+ DVD/CDPD DVD_LD CD_LD SPINDLE_PWM SLED_PWM TRACK_PWM FOCUS_PWM P.CON+A5V P.CON+3.3V VCC+6V

M_GND

KA_P 47

C4084_2

C4097 0.01 B

6.3V

C4036 0.1 B

C4065 0.01 B

W806

TP4013

W808

VCC+6V

0.8

3.9K +-1%

330

+-1%

4.7K

+-1%

0.1 F

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+5V

SPDIF

SSCRXD

SSCTXD

R4081

L4001_1

2.2uH 0405

TP4027

TP4028

TP4001

TP4002

C4090_1

C4080

TP4014

TP4020

10010V KA_P

TP4012

C4089_1

0.01 B

10010V KA_P

TP4011

W850

C4066

C4100_1

10010V KA_P

TP4022

TP4021

L4002

W5T29X7.5X19

FROM/TO REGULATOR

DVD/VR 130mm DVD COMBO 250mm

CD4002

CU2D2202

RDY(I/O(0))/RX

PCB130 DME064

GND(D)

SSCCLK/TX

GND(M)

P.CON+6V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.8V

GND(A)

SPDIF

SSCRXD

SSCTXD

(CP8001)

H-20H-19

Page 95

ABC D E F GH

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

30 31 32

26 27 28 29

VSS

DQ15

DQ14

VSSQ

DQ13

DQ12

VDDQ

DQ11

DQ10

VSSQ

DQ9

DQ8

VDDQ

UDQM

CLK

CKE

16M SDRAM IC

IC4009

M12L16161A-7TG

VSSQ

VDDQ

VSSQ

VDDQ

LDQM

/CAS

/RAS

A10/AP

VDD

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

/WE

/CS

VDDVSS

C4050_1

3.3

110111213141516171819 2202122232425

0.1 F

3.3

6789

C4045_1

3.3

0.1 F

3.3

C4046_1

3.3

0.1 F

3.3

RAMDQM

RAMRAS#

RAMCS0#

C4047_1

0.1 F

1006.3V KA_P

C4021_2

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP

SD_A0 SD_A1 SD_A2 SD_A3 SD_A4 SD_A5

SD_A6 SD_A7 SD_A8 SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_D0 SD_D1 SD_D2 SD_D3 SD_D4 SD_D5 SD_D6 SD_D7 SD_D8

SD_D9 SD_D10 SD_D11 SD_D12 SD_D13 SD_D14 SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMRAS# RAMCAS#

SD_BA0 RAMDQM RAMWE# RAMCLK RAMCKE

HA10 HA11 HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15 HA16 HA17 HA18 HA19

HD10 HD11 HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15

MEMCS0

P.CON+3.3V

(D_GND)

HA0 HA1 HA2 HA3 HA4 HA5 HA6 HA7 HA8 HA9

HD0 HD1 HD2 HD3 HD4 HD5 HD6 HD7 HD8 HD9

GND

FLASHCS HA2

RD WR

MMZ1608R102CT

C4095

0.01 B

HA16 HA15

C4064

0.1 F

HD15 HA12

HD7 HA11

HD14 HA10

HD6 HA9

HD13 HA8

HD5 HA19

HD12

HD4 WR

C4062

0.1 F

HD11

HD3

HD10 HA19

HD2 HA18

HD9 HA17

HD1 HA7

HD8 HA6

HD0 HA5

RD HA4

HA0 HA1

B4007

B4008

C4099

0.01 B

C4063_2

FLASH IC 8M

IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

1.2

3.3 VCCQ A14

GND

0.7 DQ15

1.9 DQ7

1.3 DQ14

1.2 DQ6

0.6 DQ13

0.7 DQ5

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

0.8 DQ12

DQ4

3.3 VCC

1.6 DQ11

1.6 DQ3

1.3 DQ10

1.2 DQ2

1.4 DQ9

1.4 DQ1

0.9 DQ8

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1.6 DQ0

2.6 OE#

GND

2.6 CE#

2.5 1.6 A0

25 26 27 28 29

4.7K

R4040

2206.3V KA_P

A15A16

A13

A12

A11

A10

A19

A20

WE#

RP#

VPP

WP#

A19

A18

A17

1.7

110111213141516171819 22021222324

1.0

0.8

1.5

2.5

56789

1.3

1.6

1.5

3.31.6

0.1

1.6

0.7

1.4

1.6

1.3

1.7

2.5

C4039

0.1 F

(W837)

(W838)

RESET

HA14

HA13

HA3

C4044_2

1006.3V KA_P

SD_D15 SD_D0

SD_D14 SD_D1

SD_D13 SD_D2

SD_D12 SD_D3

C4040_1

0.1 F

SD_D11 SD_D4

SD_D10 SD_D5

SD_D9 SD_D6

SD_D8 SD_D7

C4041_1

0.1 F

RAMDQM RAMWE#

RAMCLK RAMCAS#

RAMCKE

SD_A9 SD_BA0

SD_A8 SD_A10

SD_A7 SD_A0

SD_A6 SD_A1

SD_A5 SD_A2

SD_A4 SD_A3

3.3

2.3

R4048_1

C4074

3.3

47K

3.3

0.1 F

FROM AUDIO/VIDEO

RESET

STANDARD

W854

MEMCS0

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

PCB130 DME064

ABC D E F GH

H-22H-21

Page 96

ABC D E F GH

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

R2359

C2328_2

476.3V KA_P

C2348

VR DVD

Q2305

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

0.1

R2360

DVD/CDPD

(VR_CD/VR_DVD)

VR DVD

Q2303

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

R2348

3.3K

0.1

W843

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

MMZ1608R102CT

R2355

0.7

DVD/CD

Q2304

B2302

R2356

R2346

0.7

3.3K

R2347

3.3K

MMZ1608R102CT

KTA1544T-RTK/P

DVD/CD

B2301

CD LD CTL

Q2302

DVD LD

JG019

CTL

Q2301

1.0

4.5

JG017

4.5

3.9

1.0

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

C2340_2

C2341_2

3.9

R2340

6.8

JG018

R2306

6.8

R2318

6.8 R2332

220

1006.3V KA_P

R2333

220

R2341

6.8

TP2307

TP2308

DM3S/3O

FROM/TO LOADER

CP2301 LD07T2-24ND-03

GND

Vref

VCC

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

VR(DVD)

VR COM

VR(CD)

GND

PD/GND

LD(DVD)

GND

T DRV

T RTN

F DRV

F RTN

TO LOADER

CP2302 00_6232_005_006_800+

LD-

LD+

OPEN

GND(D)

FROM/TO LOADER

CP2303 00_6232_006_006_800+

SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

SLD-

SLD+

SP1-

SP1+

R2350

R2342

C2331

C2315

4.7K

R2351

4.7K

R2349

100

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

DVD/VR

DVD/CDPD

CD/VR

JG056

0.1 F

4.7K TP2304

TP2306

HOME

JG015

JG012

JG014

JG013

JG040

JG016

JG011

JG010

TP2303

R2353

100

R2352

100

P.CON+3.3V

C2357

C2358

100P CH

OPU_VREF

DVD_CD

CDLD

DVDLD

TR+

TR-

FO+

FO-

C2329_2

MOT_LD-

MOT_LD+

TOUT_SW

TIN_SW

TP2305

100P CH

C2359

OPU_F

OPU_E

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

C2360

100P CH

476.3V KA_P

100P CH

C2309

0.1 B

B2305

MMZ1608R102CT

B2305 short --- +3.3V

(DVD MT PCB)

CD_LD

DVD_LD

C2326

0.1 F

R2338

4.7K

MOTOR DRIVE IC

(RF_GND)

VIN+OP

VD2+

TP2313

C2346_2

VIN-OP

VD2-

TP2314

476.3V KA_P

30313233343536373839

VO_OP

VD1-

TP2315

R2309

VC2

C2306

100 +-1%

R2321

0.1 F

R2323

C2347

TP2320

TP2319

15K

VIN3

VD1+

1.2

0.1 F

33K

R2319

VIN3-

C2314_2

C2307 0.1 B

1.2

R2329

0.1 F

R2320

4.7K

VREF-OUT

VD3+

TP2311

C2332

REG-OUT

VD3-

3.23.283.963.46.886.9606.23.323.28 1.641.641.646.26.204.44.284.364.5200

TP2312

R2322

4.7K

PGND2

R2313

4.7K

REG-IN

PGND1

476.3V KA_P

C2327_2

R2301

TP2322

75K

10K

R2308

0 4.2 3.12 0 3.12 0 1.84 1.64 1.64 1.56 0 6.2 0 1.64 1.84 1.72 1.64 0 3 3.04 1.64 0

VCONT

S-GND

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

FWD

REV

1 1011121314151617 18 192 20 21 22

C2301

R2307

TP2321

NC NC NC NC NC NCNC

4041424344

MUTE1

VCC2

VIN4-

MUTE234

VLD-

NC NC

C2313

0.1 F

0.1 B

VLD+

56789

C2302 0.1 B

R2303 2.2

C2303 0.1 B

R2304 2.2

TRACK_PWM

R2305

VIN4

VD4+

27K

TP2309

RF_A5V

FOCUS_PWM

VREF-IN

VD4-

TP2310

10010V KA_P

VCC1

JG057

JG058

C2316_2

R2326

C2310_2

476.3V KA_P

TP2318

5.6K

VIN2

VCCS

10010V KA_P

R2327

VIN2-

VIN1+A

B2304

MMZ1608R102CT

4.7K

23242526272829

VIN2+

VIN1-A

VIN 1

10K

R2334

R2324

R2325

6.8K

R2328

4.7K

R2357 1K

R2358 120

R2336

R2337

R2330

TP2317

R2339

1.2K

10K

390

TP2316

C2304

C2312_1

0.022 B

100P CH

C2365

D2303

R2302

0.1 B

1SS355

100 +-1%

D2304

C2305

TP2323

TP2324

R2335 3.3K

1SS355

0.1 B

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP

DVD/CD DVD_LD CD_LD DVD/CDPD

RF OPU_A OPU_B OPU_C OPU_D OPU_E OPU_F VC HOME GND

(RF_GND)

GND

(D_GND)

TOUT_SW TIN_SW

P.CON+A5V TRACK_PWM FOCUS_PWM P.CON+3.3V

VDDPWM3.3V DRVSB

SPINDLE_PWM VCC+6V

SLED_PWM

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

M_GND

MOT_LD+

MOT_LD-

CAUTION

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

ARE

ATTENTION

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

TR+

TR-

FO+

FO-

MOT_SPDL+

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SLED+

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

PCB130 DME064

ABC D E F GH

H-24H-23

Page 97

ABC D E F GH

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DVD MT PCB)

C/B/U

Y/R/V

CVBS/C

C8104

C8107

C8110

150P CH

C8105

12P CH

L8102_1

1uH

0405

C8108

12P CH

L8103_1

1uH 0405

C8111

12P CH

L8104_1

1uH 0405

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP

DAC_VIDEO_C DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

P.CON+5V

(A_GND)

RESET

AMCLK ABCLK

ALRCLK

ASDATA0

DVD-H

SYS_MUTE

GND

MC MD ML

DAC_VIDEO_C

DAC_VIDEO_B

DAC_VIDEO_D

C8106

C8109

C8112

W818

150P CH

W819

150P CH

W820

150P CH

GND

(D_GND)

1006.3V KA_P

C8120

TO MEMORY

RESET

B8103

MMZ1608R102CT

C8119_2

0.1 F

C8114

C8125

C8113

C8126

R8113

470

R8112

470

DAC_C_VIDEO

DAC_B_VIDEO

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

DVD-H

RESET

D8111 1SS355

ZERO

R_AUDIO

L_AUDIO

DAC_B_VIDEO

DAC_C_VIDEO

DAC_D_DVD_VIDEO

SYS_MUTE

D8112

1SS355

R8101

C8122

TP8115

TP8101

TP8102

TP8103

TP8105

TP8106

TP8107

TP8108

TP8109

TP8110

TP8112

TP8113

TP8114

0.001 B

W826

W824

TP8111

2.4

IC8102

PCM1753DBQR

STEREO DAC IC

AGND VOUTR

10 11

2.4

C8121_2

5678

VCC

VDD

DGND

VOUTL

ZEROL/NA

ZEROR/ZEROA

VCOM

12 13 14 15 16

3.3 0 0 0 3.3 1.7 NC

1025V KA_P

ZERO

LRCK

1.61.11.63.34.92.5 1

234

BCK

DATA

SCK

ASDATA0

AMCLK

ABCLK

ALRCLK

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER DURING PLAYBACK.

FROM/TO REGULATOR

CP8101_2

IMSA-9604S-12F

DVD-H(GND)

DVD RESET

ZERO

AUDIO-R

GND

AUDIO-L

GND

CVBS

DVD COMBO 180mm

(CP8002)

FFC(1.0mm pitch)

CD8101

2F0C1602

PCB130 DME064

ABC D E F GH

H-26H-25

Page 98

FROM/TO SDRAM

FROM/TO FLASH/GPIO

FROM/TO VIF/SIF

FROM/TO AV IN/OUT

ABC D E F GH

POWER & GROUND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

DTV_ASIC IC IC2401 ZR39740HGCF-B0

(DIGITAL PCB)

DTV_ASIC IC

IC2401 ZR39740HGCF-B0

VDD Bypass Cap

3V3_D

0.1 B

C2412

C2406

VDD Bypass Cap

Place cap near pin

B2401

3V3_D

FCM1608KF-151T06

C2401

3V3_VDAC

C2407

0.1 B

C2413

10 C

B2402

B2403

B2404

B2405

3V3_PLL

C2408

1V8_PLL

C2409

3V3_VFE

C2410

3V3_IFE

C2411

10 C

C2414

C2415

C2416

C2417

0.1 B

3V3_D

1V8_D

3V3_D

FCM1608KF-151T06

C2402

FCM1608KF-151T06

C2403

FCM1608KF-151T06

C2404

FCM1608KF-151T06

C2405

ADAC_VDD

ADAC_VSS

VDD_DAC

VDD_DAC1

T10

GNDDAC_P

R10

GNDDAC_BS

PLL_VDD33

PLL_GND

PLL_VDD18

PLL_DGND

VFE_VDD

VFE_VDD1

VFE_GND

VFE_GND1

IFE_VDD33

IFE_GND

IFE_GND1

MVDD

IVDD

F12

E13

F13

G13

H13

J13

K13

L13

N10

E11

M13

R12

Place cap near pin

C2424

0.1 B

C2425

0.1 B

C2426

0.1 B

C2427

0.1 B

C2428

0.1 B

C2429

0.1 B

C2430

0.1 B

C2431

0.1 B

C2432

0.1 B

C2433

0.1 B

C2434

0.1 B

C2435

0.1 B

C2436

0.1 B

C2437

0.1 B

3V3_D

2V6_D

1V8_D

VDD Bulk Bypass cap

Place 1 cap per side of ZR740

C2441

2206.3V TZV

C2442

2206.3V TZV

C2443

2206.3V TZV

C2444

2206.3V TZV

VDD Bypass Cap

Place cap near pin

C2445

C2446

C2447

C2448

C2449

GND

L6IC2401

GND

CVDD

GND

CVDD

F10

G10

H10

J10

K10

L10

M10

G11

H11

J11

K11

L11

M11

G12

H12

J12

K12

L12

E10

F11

N11

E12

M12

N12

N13

N15

P15

R11

T11

VDD Bypass Cap

Place cap near pin

C2450

C2451

C2452

C2453

C2457

3V3_D

2V6_D

1V8_D

GND

Maximam current:270mA

Maximam current:60mA

Maximam current:1200mA

3V3_D 2V6_D 1V8_D

C2418

C2419

10 C

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

C2420

10 C

C2421

C2422

10 C

C2423

10 C

C2439

C2438

Place 1 cap per side of ZR740

10 C

VDD Bulk Bypass cap

10 C

C2440

10 C

GND

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

PCBDH0 CEF242

ABC D E F GH

H-28H-27

Page 99

FROM/TO POWER & GROUND

FROM/TO FLASH/GPIO

FROM/TO VIF/SIF

FROM/TO AV IN/OUT

ABC D E F GH

SDRAM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

NR2401

DDRWEN SWEN SDATA3 DDRDQ15

DDRRASN SRASN SDATA5 DDRDQ14

DDRBS1 SBS1 SDATA7 DDRDQ13

4D02WGJ0150TCE

DDRA0 SADR0 SDATA1 DDRDQ12

DDRA7 SADR7 SDATA0 DDRDQ10

DDRA5 SADR5 SDATA2 DDRDQ9

DDRA9 SADR9 SDATA6 DDRDQ8

NR2402

4D02WGJ0150TCE

DDRCKE SCKE SDQS0 DDRDQS0 DDRDQ2 DDRDQ13

NR2403

DDRA4 SADR4 SDATA9 DDRDQ0

DDRA12 SADR12 SDATA13 DDRDQ1

DDRA8 SADR8 SDATA11 DDRDQ2

DDRA6 SADR6 SDATA12 DDRDQ3

DDRA1 SADR1 SDATA15 DDRDQ6

DDRA2 SADR2 SDATA8 DDRDQ7

DDRA3 SADR3 SDQS1 DDRDQS1

DDRA10 SADR10

DDRA11 SADR11 SDATA4 DDRDQ11 DDRWEN DDRCKN

DDRBS0 SBS0 SDATA14 DDRDQ4

DDRDQM0 SDQM0

DDRDQM1 SDQM1 DDRA12

DDRCASN SCASN

DDRCK SCLK DDRA0 DDRA7

DDRCKN SCLKN

4D02WGJ0150TCE

R2401 15

R2402 15

R2403 15

R2404 15

R2405 15

R2406 15 R2413 15

R2407 15

R2408 15

R2409 15

R2410 15

R2411 15

DTV_ASIC IC

IC2401 ZR39740HGCF-B0

A14

SWEN

B14

SRASN

C14

SBS1

A13

SADR0

SADR7

M15

SADR5

L15

SADR9

L16

SCKE

K15

SADR4

J17

SADR12

H15

SADR8

H16

SADR6

H17

SADR13

C13

SADR1

K17

SADR2

B13

SADR3

J16

SADR10

K16

SADR11

G17

SBS0

L17

SDQM0

B17

SDQM1

D16

SCASN

M16

SCLK

N17

SCLKN

M17

(3/6 DDR)

SDATA3

SDATA5

SDATA7

SDATA1

SDATA0

SDATA2

SDATA6

SDQS0

SDATA9

SDATA13

SDATA11

SDATA12

SDATA10

SDATA15

SDATA8

SDQS1

SDATA4

SDATA14

SVREF

NR2404

4D02WGJ0150TCE

C15

B15

A15

D15

A16

B16

NR2405

4D02WGJ0150TCE

A17

C16

C17

D17

NR2406

4D02WGJ0150TCE

E16

E17

SDATA10 DDRDQ5

F17

G15

NR2407

4D02WGJ0150TCE

G16

F15

E15

R2412 15

F16

J15

C2458

0.1 B

C2459

0.1 B

DDR Bypass Cap DDR Bypass Cap

Place cap near pin

C2460

C2461

0.1 B

C2462

0.1 B C2463

10 C

DDRDQ0 DDRDQ15

DDRDQ1 DDRDQ14

DDRDQ3 DDRDQ12

DDRDQ4 DDRDQ11

DDRDQ5 DDRDQ10

DDRDQ6 DDRDQ9

DDRDQ7 DDRDQ8

C2464

0.1 B

DDRDQS1 DDRDQS0

C2465

0.1 B

DDRDQM1 DDRDQM0

DDRCASN DDRCK

DDRRASN DDRCKE

DDRBS0 DDRA11

VREF

C2466

C2467

DDRBS1 DDRA9

DDRA10 DDRA8

DDRA1 DDRA6

DDRA2 DDRA5

DDRA3 DDRA4

256Mbit DDR SDRAM IC IC2402 HY5DU561622ETP-D43

2.62 110111213141516171819 220212223242526272829 330313233

VDD

2.61

DQ0

2.62

VDDQ

2.61 4

DQ1

2.61 5

DQ2

VSSQ

2.61 789

DQ3

2.61

DQ4

2.62

VDDQ

2.61

DQ5

2.61

DQ6

VSSQ

2.61

DQ7

2.62

VDDQ

2.61

LDQS

2.62

VDD

2.61. LDM

2.62 WE

2.62 CAS

2.62 RAS

2.62 CS

2.62 BA0

2.62 BA1

2.62 AP/A10

2.62 A0

2.62 A1

2.62 A2

2.62 A3

VDD

VSS

DQ15

VSSQ

DQ14

DQ13

VDDQ

DQ12

DQ11

VSSQ

DQ10

DQ9

VDDQ

DQ8

VSSQ

UDQS

VREF

VSS

UDM

CKE

A12

A11

VSS

2.61

2.62

2.61

60 61 62 63 64 65 66

2.61

2.62

2.61 0

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

1.32 0

2.61

2.6

2.62 0

43 44 45 46 47 48 49

2.62

40 41 42

2.62

02.62

34 35 36 37 38 39

10 C

VREF

Place cap near pin

C2468

10 C

C2469

R2414

100

C2470

0.1 B

R2415

100

C2471

0.1 B

Place parts near DDR

DDRCKN

DDRCK

R2416

100

GND

2V6_D

PCBDH0 CEF242

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

ABC D E F GH

H-30H-29

Page 100

FROM/TO POWER & GROUND

FROM/TO SDRAM

FROM/TO VIF/SIF

ABC D E F GH

FLASH/GPIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

FROM/TO AV IN/OUT

DTV_ASIC IC2401ZR39740HGCF-B0

C2472

18P CH

R2417

100

C2454

R2429

0.001 B

X2401

I2C0C

I2C0D

I2C1C

I2C1D

25.000MHz

R2420 4.7K

R2421 47

R2422 47

R2423 47

R2424 47

R2460

GND

3V3_D A10

EEPROM IC

IC2403

AT24C04N-10SU-2.7

1234

VSS

GND

RESETN

3V3_D

GND MSG_REQ

R2425

R2426

3.53

VCCA0

WPA1

3.53

SCL

3.530

5678

SDA

C2473

18P CH

EJTAG_TRSTN IRR

EJTAG_TDI

EJTAG_TMS GND

EJTAG_TCK

C2582

0.1 B

CLKIN

CLKOUT

TRSTN

TDI

TDO

TMS

TCLK

TAPSEL

I2C0C

C12

I2C0D

C11

I2C1C

B11

I2C1D

B12

I2CTRNC

I2CTRND

RESETN

(4/6 FLASH/GPIO)

(CB_UP)

(TSOCLK)

(TSODATA)

(TSOFAIL)

(TSOFRM)

(TSOVAL)

(SPARE)

(RF_SWITCH)

(SPARE)

(STATUS2)

(TSIOCLK)

(TSIODATA)

(TSIOFAIL)

(TSIOFRM)

(TSIOVAL)

(STATUS0)

(CSEL)

GPIO_03(SPI_HOLD)

SPI_SO

SPI_CLK

SPI_CSN

SPI_SI

SPI_WEN

IRR

UART0TX

UART0RX

UART1TX

UART1RX

SCN_MODE

TST_MODE

GPIO_06

GPIO_07

GPIO_08

GPIO_09

GPIO_10

GPIO_11

GPIO_12

GPIO_15

GPIO_18

GPIO_17

GPIO_20

GPIO_22

GPIO_14

GPIO_23

GPIO_27

GPIO_24

GPIO_26

GPIO_25

GPIO_19

GPIO_16

GPIO_21

GPIO_41

GPIO_42

R2496 10K

R2498 10K

R2497 10K

3V3_D

C10

A11

A12

A10

B10

T12

U13

U12

T13

R13

P16

N16

A11

A12

B10

VID_IN_DEL

REOUT_SEL

LED_RED

GPIO_09

GPIO_11

GPIO_12

CH_DN

LED_GRN

GPIO_26

GPIO_25

VID_DET

R2431 47

R2513 10

R2430

JG2401

JG2402

JG2403

JG2404

JG2407

JG2408

JG2413

JG2414

JG2415

JG2416

JG2417

GND

R2499 10K

NR2408

4D02WGJ0470TCE

UART0TX_DM

UART0RX_DM

GND I2C1D

LED1

LED2

DEMOD_FAIL

SD_CS

740_INIT

740_COMM

SD_H/SEL_SW AFT1

AFT1

AFT0 AFT0

DEMOD_LOCK

SD_DET

JG2425

JG2441

JG2440

I2C0C 3V3_D

I2C0D

I2C1C

SD_DET

R2490

R2491

A11

A12

A10

B10

4.7K C2474

4.7K

Pull up resistor

0.1 B

0.85

R2434 2.2K

R2435 2.2K

R2436 2.2K

R2437 2.2K

R2503 2.2K

R2504 2.2K

R2505 2.2K

R2506 2.2K

R2517 4.7K

R2519 4.7K

R2512 2.2K

SPI_FLASH IC IC2405 EN25P16-50HCP

1234

HOLD

/VPPW

VSS D

VCCS

3.45

5678

UART0RX_DM

UART0TX_DM

3V3_D

SD_DET

SD_RD

SD_CLK

SD_WR

SD_CS

SD card update

JG2445

JG2409

JG2410

JG2411

JG2412

JG2443

JG2444

A2001WR2-9P

GND

UART0RX

UART0TX

+3.3V

SD_DET

SD_RD

SD_CLK

SD_WR

SD_CS

CP2420

PCBDH0 CEF242

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

ABC D E F GH

H-32H-31